<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=N.paul</id>
	<title>Tactic Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=N.paul"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/N.paul"/>
	<updated>2026-05-27T20:27:03Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.37.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Donation_Module&amp;diff=3643</id>
		<title>Donation Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Donation_Module&amp;diff=3643"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T05:53:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Creation of a Donation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Donation is an integrated part of an established organisation. All types of organisations, such as a large, medium and a small, and especially NGOs look forward to receive donations for multiple reasons. Hence, it is important for the organisations to keep a record of their donations reception. Tactic helps the users in keeping a record of the donations with the help of donation module.&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The “Billing” menu of Tactic provides the opportunity of creating Donation related records effectively within a few easy steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation = &lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services. &lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of a Donation =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu need to be selected for proceeding with the process of creating donation card. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New donation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be selected. All the required criteria need to be filled for keeping all the important information related to the donation that your organization has received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding projects ==&lt;br /&gt;
If any of your donation is a part of one of your projects, then you can add the project to the donation card. For adding the project to a donation, you need to follow few steps, which are mentioned below, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commerce menu (from main menu) -&amp;gt; Donations -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned donation -&amp;gt; click on “modify” -&amp;gt; fill the project field by clicking on the drop-down menu -&amp;gt; Save. The donation will be updated with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Modifying a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
The donation can be modified by going to the donation record. The option called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; need to be clicked for modifying the record. After modifying the donation record, the users need to press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Tactic will update the donation record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Cancelling a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
For cancelling a donation, you need to go to billing/payment menu (from main menu) -&amp;gt; donations -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the donation -&amp;gt; click on cancel -&amp;gt; the donation will be cancelled with the completion of this step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option after going to the donation card is enough to delete the donation card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Donation_Module&amp;diff=3642</id>
		<title>Donation Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Donation_Module&amp;diff=3642"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T05:43:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Modifying a donation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Donation is an integrated part of an established organisation. All types of organisations, such as a large, medium and a small, and especially NGOs look forward to receive donations for multiple reasons. Hence, it is important for the organisations to keep a record of their donations reception. Tactic helps the users in keeping a record of the donations with the help of donation module.&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The “Billing” menu of Tactic provides the opportunity of creating Donation related records effectively within a few easy steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation = &lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services. &lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of a Donation =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu need to be selected for proceeding with the process of creating donation card. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New donation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be selected. All the required criteria need to be filled for keeping all the important information related to the donation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding projects ==&lt;br /&gt;
If any of your donation is a part of one of your projects, then you can add the project to the donation card. For adding the project to a donation, you need to follow few steps, which are mentioned below, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commerce menu (from main menu) -&amp;gt; Donations -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned donation -&amp;gt; click on “modify” -&amp;gt; fill the project field by clicking on the drop-down menu -&amp;gt; Save. The donation will be updated with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Modifying a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
The donation can be modified by going to the donation record. The option called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; need to be clicked for modifying the record. After modifying the donation record, the users need to press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Tactic will update the donation record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Cancelling a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
For cancelling a donation, you need to go to billing/payment menu (from main menu) -&amp;gt; donations -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the donation -&amp;gt; click on cancel -&amp;gt; the donation will be cancelled with the completion of this step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option after going to the donation card is enough to delete the donation card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Donation_Module&amp;diff=3641</id>
		<title>Donation Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Donation_Module&amp;diff=3641"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T05:40:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Introduction */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Donation is an integrated part of an established organisation. All types of organisations, such as a large, medium and a small, and especially NGOs look forward to receive donations for multiple reasons. Hence, it is important for the organisations to keep a record of their donations reception. Tactic helps the users in keeping a record of the donations with the help of donation module.&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The “Billing” menu of Tactic provides the opportunity of creating Donation related records effectively within a few easy steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation = &lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services. &lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of a Donation =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu need to be selected for proceeding with the process of creating donation card. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New donation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be selected. All the required criteria need to be filled for keeping all the important information related to the donation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding projects ==&lt;br /&gt;
If any of your donation is a part of one of your projects, then you can add the project to the donation card. For adding the project to a donation, you need to follow few steps, which are mentioned below, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commerce menu (from main menu) -&amp;gt; Donations -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned donation -&amp;gt; click on “modify” -&amp;gt; fill the project field by clicking on the drop-down menu -&amp;gt; Save. The donation will be updated with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects_in_donation_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Modifying a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
The loan can be modified by going to the donation record. The option called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; need to be clicked for modifying the record. After modifying the donation record, the users need to press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Tactic will update the donation record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Donation_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Cancelling a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
For cancelling a donation, you need to go to billing/payment menu (from main menu) -&amp;gt; donations -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the donation -&amp;gt; click on cancel -&amp;gt; the donation will be cancelled with the completion of this step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting a donation =&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option after going to the donation card is enough to delete the donation card.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Tactic-How-To&amp;diff=3640</id>
		<title>Tactic-How-To</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Tactic-How-To&amp;diff=3640"/>
		<updated>2024-11-30T11:19:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* How to questions for Miscellaneous Activities */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Events/Agenda Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to export Tactic Agenda and include it into a third party application, such as Google? &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exporting the Tactic agendas the users need to go through the basic steps of agenda module. At first the users need to activate the agenda module and then follow the following steps: &lt;br /&gt;
*	The users need to create events and agendas &lt;br /&gt;
*	The users can go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;other&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab from the module setup page&lt;br /&gt;
*	Then the users need to input a word of their choice into the field of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;key to allow export&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*	Then the users need to enter any word of their choice and proceed towards completion by clicking on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*	The users can get the link on the line and can proceed with completing the procedure by advancing their focus towards &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“An export link to ical format is available at following link” &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
An example of the build link is provided in the following lines: &lt;br /&gt;
 http://mysite/comm/action/agendaexport.php?format=ical&amp;amp;type=event&amp;amp;exportkey=choosen_word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Then the users need to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;agenda parameters&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; of the third party application that the users will be using for exporting the agenda. The users need to add the URL properly for exporting the Tactic agenda. &lt;br /&gt;
However, the users can face problem after pasting the link. Google can show notifications such as, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;The URL cannot be generated, as the robot.txt file does not allow exploration&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. In this case the users need to edit the robot.txt files, which is already persistent in the Tactic root website. The users can change it into something that can be explored by the third party application. &lt;br /&gt;
 User-agent: *&lt;br /&gt;
 Disallow: /&lt;br /&gt;
 User-agent: Googlebot&lt;br /&gt;
 Disallow: /&lt;br /&gt;
 Allow :&lt;br /&gt;
 /comm/action/agendaexport.php?format=ical&amp;amp;type=event&amp;amp;exportkey=chosen_word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the users need to wait for 24 hours as it takes quite a lot of time by the users to be known by Google.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  Accounting simplified Module==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to set up the accounting module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For setting up the accounting modules the users need to follow the mentioned steps: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; Financial Modules (Accounting/Treasury)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -&amp;gt; The users need to choose their preferred module ([[Accounting_simplified_Module|Simplified accounting]] or [[Accounting_double_entry_Module|accounting double entry]], the users need to remember that only one of these modules can be activated at a time). Before using the accounting modules the users need to create bank accounts in Tactic and create invoices, expense reports so that the data is visible under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounting&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu. If the users activate simplified accounting then they will only be able to perform a limited number of activities with the help of that module, such as validating invoices and recording reports. However, if the users activate double entry accounting then they will be able to add journals, ledger and many more other advanced accounting feature, which will certainly be prove to a positive experience of using Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add or change a chart of account?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It has been sated before that Tactic comes with a number of charts of accounts already and the user can change these charts of account at any time they want. Changing the charts of accounts is not at all a complicated process, as it may seem to be. For changing the charts of account the users need to follow some steps, which are: Accounting (From the menu bar) -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Chart of accounts -&amp;gt; The users will be able to see the option of Select active chart of accounts -&amp;gt; Select the preferred chart of accounts from the drop down menu -&amp;gt; Change and load. After completing these steps the users will be able to use new chart of account easily. However, without activation of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Accounting_double_entry_Module|Accounting double entry]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module it is impossible to use the charts of account. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to create custom chart of accounts in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There are already a number of chart of accounts added in Tactic. However, the users may need their custom chart of accounts for enhancing their business related ventures. It is needed to be stated that tactic does not support creation of custom chart of account through its default settings. Hence, for accomplishing this feature the users need to adopt two alternate methods. The first method is to follow GUI and the second method is to ask support from the Tactic support team. The users can contact the Tactic support team by dropping a mail on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; by their registered mail ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Bank and cash module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can a bank statement be imported in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Bank statements can certainly be imported in Tactic by manual procedure. The importation of bank statements are performed by following some steps. For accomplishing this the users need to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Bank_and_cash_module|Bank module]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and then click on the options of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank entries&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users at first need to choose the Bank and Cash menu from the menu bar, then they need to follow the following steps: Bank and Cash menu -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; one of the banks from the list needs to be chosen -&amp;gt; Bank entries -&amp;gt; Add entry. At the add entry filed the users can add their preferred bank statement and can enjoy the rest of the functionalities of Tactic Bank and Cash module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Barcode Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can I add a QR code in my invoices?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a QR code to the invoices is not something very complicated. It can be achieved with some small steps. For accomplishing the same you just need to go to Home-&amp;gt; Setup-&amp;gt; other setup. There you can find the blank area, in which you can add your own setup options. In the criterion of name you need to add &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_ADD_ZATCA_QR_CODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and set the value to 1. Then click the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete. After completing Tactic will be generating PDFs with QR codes, when you use the “crabe” or “sponge” templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Tags and Categories Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add tags and categories?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tags and categories play an important role in specifying the type of a product or a vendor or a customer or a member and many more. The users of Tactic have been provided with the opportunity of creating tags and categories for various elements such as products, third parties, members and more. The creation of the tags and categories can be performed with the help of Tactic GUI. It can also be accomplished with the help of few steps, these steps are: Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Tags_and_Categories_Module|Tags and categories module]] -&amp;gt; the users need to activate the module for creating tags and categories. Then the users need to visit any module that contains the feature of tags and categories much as the member module. They need to follow the next steps then, Member menu (From the main menu bar) -&amp;gt; Tags and categories (from the vertical menu) -&amp;gt; New tag/category -&amp;gt; Fill up the needed criteria -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the tags the users will be able to use the tags and categories feature seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==  How to questions for Customer Invoice Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a daily, weekly and monthly sales report system in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As for now sales reports cannot be found in Tactic, however, the users can generate a monthly payment report for customers and vendors from the Billing module. The users will be able to generate the payment report for any month just by adding their preferred months. For achieving this the users need to first activate the [[Customer_Invoice_Module|invoice module]], by following these steps, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Invoice -&amp;gt; activate -&amp;gt; Billing module -&amp;gt; Vendor invoices/Customer invoices -&amp;gt;  Reporting -&amp;gt; the users then need to choose the months -&amp;gt; Create&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The monthly report will be generated as a PDF format. Tactic generates the reports in a PDF format to eliminate the efforts of the users. The reports can directly be added to the organization’s documents without having to perform any modification and alteration.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can I add a QR code in my invoices?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a QR code to the invoices is not something very complicated. It can be achieved with some small steps. For accomplishing the same you just need to go to Home-&amp;gt; Setup-&amp;gt; other setup. There you can find the blank area, in which you can add your own setup options. In the criterion of name you need to add INVOICE_ADD_ZATCA_QR_CODE and set the value to 1. Then click the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete. After completing Tactic will be generating PDFs with QR codes, when you use the “crabe” or “sponge” templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic support different invoice types based on different country standard?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As it has been stated before that Tactic is designed for eliminating the manual efforts of the customers with the help of digitization. This is what made the Tactic developers develop Tactic as an all in one ERP &amp;amp; CRM solution. Therefore, Tactic certainly supports different types of invoices for providing the users with an excellent and updated services.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can invoice be generated in a PDF format?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic effectively reduces the amount of manual effort that a business organisation or an individual applies in the work process. Hence, it is quite acceptable for Tactic to provide the users with an opportunity of generating the invoices in the PDF format. For accomplishing this the users only need to go to the [[Customer_Invoice_Module|invoice module]] from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu the process of generating PDF is: Billing/ Payment menu -&amp;gt; Customer invoice/Vendor invoice -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Click on the desired invoice -&amp;gt; Linked file -&amp;gt; Generate. After clicking on generate the users will be able to see the generated PDF file in the following area. Upon clicking on the PDF name a pop up will show whether to show or download the file. The users can download the file by choosing the download option easily. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there an option of adding signature in invoices? &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures are an integrated part of invoices, hence, it was important to provide the mandatory feature of adding signature to the users. The users will certainly be able to add signatures, seals and other related elements in the invoices and proposals. For completing this the users need to go through a few steps. The users need to go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Customer_Invoice_Module|invoice module]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Free Text on invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be visible under the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;other options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users can enter their signature on the area and it will be used in every invoice that is issues through Tactic. The users can add watermarks as well by adding their watermark in the following criterion called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;watermarks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can the border style in invoice be changed?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic has already provided the users with a number of PDF templates already within its set-up. However, the users may not find those as their preferred PDF templates, and they can easily modify their own PDF template and use that in their invoices. Same can be done with the border style in invoices as well. The users can also achieve the same with the help of GUI as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can we change the invoice number going beyond the default numbering system?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We are afraid that the users cannot change the invoice number going beyond the numbering system all by themselves. As Tactic automatically creates invoices’ number based on the previously completed invoices, it is not possible to change the number of invoices through the software. However, we understand that the users might face situation where they need to change the invoice number for their use. In this case the users can easily contact the Tactic team and ask for assistance. The users can drop a mail at support@alsoft.org from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact the users within 48 hours. However, you can change the invoice number format, if that helps you. For achieving the same you can go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; [[Customer_Invoice_Module|invoice module]] -&amp;gt; Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add Tax invoice in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Taxes are one of the most important factors associated with business. Hence, it is necessary to manage all the business related taxes error free. Keeping a record of tax invoices is one of the most effective method of managing all the taxes. This can be performed easily with Tactic.  Adding Tax invoices in tactic can be performed with the combination of a few small steps. The very first step of adding tax invoices in Tactic is associated with visiting Home -&amp;gt; [[#Setting_up_company/_organisation|Company/Organisation]] -&amp;gt; enable taxes as per choice. Tactic allows the users to add up to three different Taxes. After enabling the Taxes the users will be able to enjoy the Tax invoice in the Billing module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a method of adding automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders? If there is a way then how can I accomplish this easily?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As Tactic has been designed for increasing the convenience of the users it is certainly possible for the users to add automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders. For adding automatic terms and conditions the user only have to add those terms and conditions to the public note area and it will be visible in the PDF version of the invoice, contract or proposals. For adding terms and conditions the users need to follow these steps: Commerce menu (for contracts and proposals)/ Billing menu (for invoices) -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; select the preferred one -&amp;gt; Notes (from the ribbon) -&amp;gt; Add terms and conditions in public note -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the users need to generate PDF version of that invoice/contract/proposal. The Terms and conditions will be visible. The users can add terms and conditions in the public note area while creating an invoice/contract/proposal as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can numbers to words be added to the invoice within Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There is no direct method available for changing numbers to words. Hence, for enjoying this feature the users need to contact the Tactic Team and place their request for a customised service. For contacting the Tactic team the user need to drop a mail at &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for this paid service. It is important for the users to drop the mail only from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact them within 48 hours and let the users know if their paid request can be processed or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Are there different types of invoices available in the Tactic invoice module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Different types of invoices are available Tactic based on the activities. There are different invoices such as VAT invoice, TAX invoice, Customer invoice, Vendor invoice and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Accounting double entry Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to set up the accounting module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For setting up the accounting modules the users need to follow the mentioned steps: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; Financial Modules (Accounting/Treasury)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -&amp;gt; The users need to choose their preferred module ([[Accounting_simplified_Module|Simplified accounting]] or [[Accounting_double_entry_Module|accounting double entry]], the users need to remember that only one of these modules can be activated at a time). Before using the accounting modules the users need to create bank accounts in Tactic and create invoices, expense reports so that the data is visible under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounting&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu. If the users activate simplified accounting then they will only be able to perform a limited number of activities with the help of that module, such as validating invoices and recording reports. However, if the users activate double entry accounting then they will be able to add journals, ledger and many more other advanced accounting feature, which will certainly be prove to a positive experience of using Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add or change a chart of account?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It has been sated before that Tactic comes with a number of charts of accounts already and the user can change these charts of account at any time they want. Changing the charts of accounts is not at all a complicated process, as it may seem to be. For changing the charts of account the users need to follow some steps, which are: Accounting (From the menu bar) -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Chart of accounts -&amp;gt; The users will be able to see the option of Select active chart of accounts -&amp;gt; Select the preferred chart of accounts from the drop down menu -&amp;gt; Change and load. After completing these steps the users will be able to use new chart of account easily. However, without activation of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Accounting_double_entry_Module|Accounting double entry]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module it is impossible to use the charts of account. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to create custom chart of accounts in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There are already a number of chart of accounts added in Tactic. However, the users may need their custom chart of accounts for enhancing their business related ventures. It is needed to be stated that tactic does not support creation of custom chart of account through its default settings. Hence, for accomplishing this feature the users need to adopt two alternate methods. The first method is to follow GUI and the second method is to ask support from the Tactic support team. The users can contact the Tactic support team by dropping a mail on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; by their registered mail ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Email Collector Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can I use a Gmail account for my Tactic Email collector?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Email collectors are designed for helping the user to collect important emails and make tickets out of those automatically. The users can certainly add any account that they want as the default receiver for the Email collector module. For accomplishing this the user just need to go to the email collector module and then add their preferred Gmail account as the [[Email_Collector_Module|Email collector]]. This can be performed by following a few steps, which are, Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; Interfaces with external systems -&amp;gt; Email Collector -&amp;gt; Click on the reference name of the Email collector -&amp;gt; From the area of filters add an receiver (s) -&amp;gt; add the Gmail account at the area beside it -&amp;gt; Add. After completing this the users will be able to collect emails through the Gmail account.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to put email collector into work?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Email_Collector_Module|Email collector]] helps in enhancing the CRM (Customer Relationship Management) program in a much better manner. The primary work that an Email collector does is to collect emails and make tickets out of those. It may be a bit complicated to understand, hence, an example can help in understanding the working procedure of an email collector. Just as the users send various emails at &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; by their registered email ID regarding various matters and confusions that they come across while using Tactic. Our, Tactic Team’s responsibility is to read those mails and get back to the users with proper solutions. However, it is no always possible to read a vast amount emails and reply all day. This is where Email collector makes our work easier. Email collector collects and make tickets out of those emails, so that the Tactic team can easily map out the method with which they can provide the users with assistance.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is exactly how the users can put the email collectors into work. Tactic email collector will be collecting all the emails from the users’ clients, customers, vendors and more. Moreover, the Tactic email collector is also capable of collecting responses, collecting leads and making projects out of those and collecting candidatures. Additionally, the users can add their own preferred email collectors for better use of Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Mass Emailing Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;What to do if I am unable to send emails through Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For using the emailing facilities of Tactic the users need to properly configure the Tactic [[Mass_Emailing_Module|email module]]. Without proper configuration the module will not be able to send emails properly. The users also need to check their sender and receiver email addresses for better and disruption free emailing procedures. Only the persistence of any error in emailing module configuration and error in sender and receiver emailing addresses can lead towards such difficulties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Leave request management Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic provide an automatic decrease of leave balance upon approval?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is designed to increase the convenience of the users, hence, it is surely capable of decreasing leave balance upon approval. However, before having the leave balance the users need to create type of leaves along with their numbers so that Tactic can easily read the data and update the balance of leaves. For creating type of leaves the users need to follow these steps: Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; [[Dictionary_setup|Dictionaries]] (from the vertical menu bar) -&amp;gt; Type of leaves (From the tables) -&amp;gt; the table containing already existing leaves will be visible -&amp;gt; the users need to add Type of leave, label, value -&amp;gt; Add. The user can also modify an existing leave by clicking on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. After adding the leaves the users will be able to enjoy automatic update of leave balance in Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Product Lots Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is it possible to track an individual product with the help of its lot and serial number?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, it is possible to track a product just with the help of its lot and serial number. For tracking a product you need to go to products menu -&amp;gt; Lots/serial number -&amp;gt; click on the lots and serial lists of the product that you want to track. The lots/serial card will open and you will have to choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show log movement for couple product lot&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The window with all the log movements will open and you can easily track the last activity that has taken place with the product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Manufacturing Order Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add projects in MO modules? If yes then what is the method of accomplishing it?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, projects can certainly be added in the [[Manufacturing_Order_Module|MO module]]. As Tactic’s users are belonging from different types of business originations we understand that the users’ organisation can be associated with mass manufacturing projects. For which it is important to provide the users with the convenience of adding projects in the MO module. In order to add a project in the MO module the users need to go the MRP menu from the main menu bar and then go the manufacturing order menu. They need to choose new manufacturing order for creating new MO. While creating a new MO the users need to select the project from the drop down menu that appears right beside the blank area of adding projects. However, the users need to create projects before attempting to add projects from the dropdown menu. If there is no accurate projects then the users can also create projects from the MO module itself. For creating a new project the users only need to click on the add button (plus sign) and enter all the mandatory information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to use Manufacturing Orders module effectively?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic has an addition of manufacturing order for making it easy for the users who are associated with massive manufacturing works. Tactic makes it easy to keep an official record and a track of all the manufacturing orders within a single space. Hence, it is important to use the Manufacturing orders module effectively. For using this module at its full functionality the users need to configure the module properly. For configuring the MO module the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Product_Module|Product management]] -&amp;gt; Manufacturing orders -&amp;gt; Activate the module -&amp;gt; click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; Perform all the settings as per preference -&amp;gt; Modify. The users can also add complimentary attributes based on their preferences, it is optional. After completing the configuration the users need to click on the MRP menu to access [[Manufacturing_Order_Module|MO module]]. Upon opening the MO module, the users need to choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New manufacturing order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for adding new MO within Tactic. After the MO car opens the users need to add all the important and mandatory information to continue creating a new MO. After creation of an MO the users will easily be able to change the statuses of all the MO. If the MO is still in &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Draft&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; status, it can be modified. Once the status of the MO changes to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Validated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; it cannot be changed anymore. The MO then can be changed as &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Produced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, once the order is produced. The closed or produced MOs can be re-opened as well. For re-opening the MOs the users just need to open the MO card and then click on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;re-open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to manage value transfer in Manufacturing orders module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Manufacturing_Order_Module|Manufacturing Order module]] is initially made for keeping track for the manufacturing orders as well as production. The functionality of automatic update of the value of stock is not attached in MO, however, the users can certainly perform the value transfer manually. For achieving this modification the users can easily use the batch numbers of a specific product while creating an MO. The users at first need to create a BOM with the batch number and then add it while creating the MO. For creating a BOM with the batch number the users need to go to the MRP menu from the main menu bar and then add the batch number at the place of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Label&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Then after creating the BOM the users need to create an MO from the same menu. The steps of creating the MO are: MRP -&amp;gt; Manufacturing orders -&amp;gt; new manufacturing order -&amp;gt; Fill up all the important and mandatory criteria (including choosing the right MO) -&amp;gt; Create. After production the users can correct the stocks by following some steps, which are: Product menu -&amp;gt; Stock -&amp;gt; Movements -&amp;gt; click on the movement code -&amp;gt; correct stock -&amp;gt; Enter information -&amp;gt; Save. After saving all of the value will be transferred manually.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Point Of Sale ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to use the TakePOS module properly?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The POS (Point of Sale) modules have been added to Tactic to be used by the supermarkets or the restaurants. For using [[Point_Of_Sale|TakePOS module]] seamlessly, the first thing that the users require to do is to activate the TakePOS module. Activation of TakePOS module can be performed from the Home and then Setup menu. After activating the module the user need to click on the Cog sign to add the parameters and save those to enjoy the functionalities of the TakePOS module. For activating the module the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; POS TakePos -&amp;gt; Activate -&amp;gt; Click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; Add the parameters -&amp;gt; Add the number of terminals (adding terminals are important to use TakePOS) -&amp;gt; Save -&amp;gt; Configure the terminals (by clicking on the ribbon) -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the users need to open the TakePOS module and add a new cash desk closing. It is important to choose TakePOS as the application and the desired terminal number and click on start. TakePOS will be ready to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Product Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to import new stocks for the products that already exists?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, Tactic allows the users to import new stocks for already existing products through the module &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tools&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. After going to the tools the users need to click on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New import&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Upon choosing this option the users can easily import the files that contain new import for already existing products. However, it is important for the users to list the stock update in a CSV file for working with Tactic more prominently. The users can then update the new stock of the existing products.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to delete products that are added in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic cares about the security and safety of all the important data of the users. Hence, for security purposes the users are not provided with a delete option within the product card, the delete option is mostly disabled. Hence, for deleting a product the users need to delete all the related records beforehand. Related records can include all the invoices, sales orders and projects that are associated with that specific product. The users can start with closing all of the invoices and POS terminals in which the product is used. The users will not be able to delete the product if any of the invoices are still open and the product is used in POS terminals. Hence, for deleting the products the user at first need to go to Billing menu -&amp;gt; (Customer/Vendor) Invoices -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Close all the invoices (Classify paid) (The users cannot delete the invoices for security purposes). The projects need to be deleted as well. For deleting the projects it is important to close them then delete them. The steps for deleting a project are: Project menu -&amp;gt; List of open projects -&amp;gt; click on the associated projects -&amp;gt; close -&amp;gt; delete. For closing the orders the user need to go to Commerce menu -&amp;gt; (Sales orders/ purchase orders) List -&amp;gt; select the order -&amp;gt; Delete. Upon deleting all the records of the product the users can go to the Product menu -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Click on the product that need to be deleted -&amp;gt; Delete (the option will be available).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to disable discounts for some of the products?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
No, it is not possible to disable the discounts for some specific products while having the default discount intact. The users need to change the entire discount to apply it for products.&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Product variant module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add product variant in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Different products have different sizes and different colours, however, same products can also have different sizes and different colours. These are called the product variants, the product variants are added in Tactic with a very short process. However, for creating products and then product variants the users first need to activate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Products&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Product_Variants_Module|Product variant module]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Without activating these modules the users will not be able to create product variants. After activation of these modules the users need to follow some steps, First you have to add the different variants Under the options on Product menu there will be an option called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Variant attributes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; which are: Product menu (From the main menu bar) -&amp;gt; Products -&amp;gt; New Product (as creating new product is necessary to create product variant) -&amp;gt; fill all the mandatory information -&amp;gt; Create -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Select the product for creating variant -&amp;gt; Variant (from the ribbon that appears above the product card) -&amp;gt; New Variant -&amp;gt; Fill the criteria of variant attribute -&amp;gt; Create. New variants for products will be ready after completing this step. However, the users need to create variant attributes first before creating a product variant. For creating a product variant the users need to choose the option of variant attributes and add different attributes by clicking on the plus sign. The users can add different attributes such as colour, sizes and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is it possible to track an individual product with the help of its lot and serial number?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, it is possible to track a product just with the help of its lot and serial number. For tracking a product you need to go to products menu -&amp;gt; Lots/serial number -&amp;gt; click on the lots and serial lists of the product that you want to track. The lots/serial card will open and you will have to choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show log movement for couple product lot&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The window with all the log movements will open and you can easily track the last activity that has taken place with the product.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add product images in product cards? &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is designed for the small, medium sized, as well as the large companies. The business organisations certainly possess a large number of products and those require proper management to enhance the workflow of an organisation. Therefore, it is important to help the business organisation to manage their large number of products without having to face any kind of disruption. This is why the Tactic developers have designed Tactic to easily allow the users add product pictures for better management purpose. However, there is not any direct option to add pictures that is available in other modules, such as members and users. For adding pictures in the product card the users need to go the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link file&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the product that can be opened from the product list. The users of Tactic only need to link the image file with the product and Tactic will automatically add the first added image as the image for the product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Projects or Leads Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can we add projects in MO modules? If yes then what is the method of accomplishing it?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, projects can certainly be added in the [[Manufacturing_Order_Module|Manufacturing order module]]. As Tactic’s users are belonging from different types of business originations we understand that the users’ organisation can be associated with mass manufacturing projects. For which it is important to provide the users with the convenience of adding projects in the MO module. In order to add a project in the MO module the users need to go the MRP menu from the main menu bar and then go the manufacturing order menu. They need to choose new manufacturing order for creating new MO. While creating a new MO the users need to select the project from the drop down menu that appears right beside the blank area of adding projects. However, the users need to create projects before attempting to add projects from the dropdown menu. If there is no accurate projects then the users can also create projects from the MO module itself. For creating a new project the users only need to click on the add button (plus sign) and enter all the mandatory information.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Scheduled jobs Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to set up scheduled jobs in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Scheduled_jobs_Module|Scheduled jobs]] are one of the most helpful objects that can help in scheduling very common yet important jobs that occur within Tactic, such as collecting emails and deleting logs and temporary files. Performing the configuration of scheduled job is quite easy and can be completed within a few click. For setting up scheduled jobs the users need to go to the scheduled job option from Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; Scheduled jobs -&amp;gt; Activate -&amp;gt; Click on the cog sign. Upon clicking on the settings of scheduled jobs the users will be able to get a view of already scheduled jobs. The users can edit those jobs or add new jobs from the plus sign that can be found in the top of the list. Scheduled jobs can be added by filling every mandatory criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Vendor invoice module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a daily, weekly and monthly sales report system in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As for now sales reports cannot be found in Tactic, however, the users can generate a monthly payment report for customers and vendors from the Billing module. The users will be able to generate the payment report for any month just by adding their preferred months. For achieving this the users need to first activate the [[Vendor_invoice_module|invoice module]], by following these steps, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Invoice -&amp;gt; activate -&amp;gt; Billing module -&amp;gt; Vendor invoices/Customer invoices -&amp;gt;  Reporting -&amp;gt; the users then need to choose the months -&amp;gt; Create&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The monthly report will be generated as a PDF format. Tactic generates the reports in a PDF format to eliminate the efforts of the users. The reports can directly be added to the organization’s documents without having to perform any modification and alteration.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can I add a QR code in my invoices?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a QR code to the invoices is not something very complicated. It can be achieved with some small steps. For accomplishing the same you just need to go to Home-&amp;gt; Setup-&amp;gt; other setup. There you can find the blank area, in which you can add your own setup options. In the criterion of name you need to add INVOICE_ADD_ZATCA_QR_CODE and set the value to 1. Then click the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete. After completing Tactic will be generating PDFs with QR codes, when you use the “crabe” or “sponge” templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic support different invoice types based on different country standard?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As it has been stated before that Tactic is designed for eliminating the manual efforts of the customers with the help of digitization. This is what made the Tactic developers develop Tactic as an all in one ERP &amp;amp; CRM solution. Therefore, Tactic certainly supports different types of invoices for providing the users with an excellent and updated services.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can invoice be generated in a PDF format?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic effectively reduces the amount of manual effort that a business organisation or an individual applies in the work process. Hence, it is quite acceptable for Tactic to provide the users with an opportunity of generating the invoices in the PDF format. For accomplishing this the users only need to go to the [[Vendor_invoice_module|invoice module]] from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu the process of generating PDF is: Billing/ Payment menu -&amp;gt; Customer invoice/Vendor invoice -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Click on the desired invoice -&amp;gt; Linked file -&amp;gt; Generate. After clicking on generate the users will be able to see the generated PDF file in the following area. Upon clicking on the PDF name a pop up will show whether to show or download the file. The users can download the file by choosing the download option easily. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there an option of adding signature in invoices? &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures are an integrated part of invoices, hence, it was important to provide the mandatory feature of adding signature to the users. The users will certainly be able to add signatures, seals and other related elements in the invoices and proposals. For completing this the users need to go through a few steps. The users need to go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Vendor_invoice_module|invoice module]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Free Text on invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be visible under the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;other options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users can enter their signature on the area and it will be used in every invoice that is issues through Tactic. The users can add watermarks as well by adding their watermark in the following criterion called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;watermarks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can the border style in invoice be changed?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic has already provided the users with a number of PDF templates already within its set-up. However, the users may not find those as their preferred PDF templates, and they can easily modify their own PDF template and use that in their invoices. Same can be done with the border style in invoices as well. The users can also achieve the same with the help of GUI as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can we change the invoice number going beyond the default numbering system?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We are afraid that the users cannot change the invoice number going beyond the numbering system all by themselves. As Tactic automatically creates invoices’ number based on the previously completed invoices, it is not possible to change the number of invoices through the software. However, we understand that the users might face situation where they need to change the invoice number for their use. In this case the users can easily contact the Tactic team and ask for assistance. The users can drop a mail at support@alsoft.org from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact the users within 48 hours. However, you can change the invoice number format, if that helps you. For achieving the same you can go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; [[Vendor_invoice_module|invoice module]] -&amp;gt; Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add Tax invoice in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Taxes are one of the most important factors associated with business. Hence, it is necessary to manage all the business related taxes error free. Keeping a record of tax invoices is one of the most effective method of managing all the taxes. This can be performed easily with Tactic.  Adding Tax invoices in tactic can be performed with the combination of a few small steps. The very first step of adding tax invoices in Tactic is associated with visiting Home -&amp;gt; [[#Setting_up_company/_organisation|Company/Organisation]] -&amp;gt; enable taxes as per choice. Tactic allows the users to add up to three different Taxes. After enabling the Taxes the users will be able to enjoy the Tax invoice in the Billing module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a method of adding automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders? If there is a way then how can I accomplish this easily?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As Tactic has been designed for increasing the convenience of the users it is certainly possible for the users to add automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders. For adding automatic terms and conditions the user only have to add those terms and conditions to the public note area and it will be visible in the PDF version of the invoice, contract or proposals. For adding terms and conditions the users need to follow these steps: Commerce menu (for contracts and proposals)/ Billing menu (for invoices) -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; select the preferred one -&amp;gt; Notes (from the ribbon) -&amp;gt; Add terms and conditions in public note -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the users need to generate PDF version of that invoice/contract/proposal. The Terms and conditions will be visible. The users can add terms and conditions in the public note area while creating an invoice/contract/proposal as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can numbers to words be added to the invoice within Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There is no direct method available for changing numbers to words. Hence, for enjoying this feature the users need to contact the Tactic Team and place their request for a customised service. For contacting the Tactic team the user need to drop a mail at &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for this paid service. It is important for the users to drop the mail only from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact them within 48 hours and let the users know if their paid request can be processed or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Are there different types of invoices available in the Tactic invoice module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Different types of invoices are available Tactic based on the activities. There are different invoices such as VAT invoice, TAX invoice, Customer invoice, Vendor invoice and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Tax Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to change or set up new the VAT or TAX rate in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We understand that the Tactic users belong to different nations and regions and the standard VAT and TAX rate set-up will not be same everywhere. Hence, it is important to provide the users with an option of changing the VAT or TAX rates manually. Therefore, changing Tax and VAT rates in Tactic is quite easy. In order to change the default VAT rate the user can go to Home-&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; [[Dictionary_setup|Dictionary setup]] -&amp;gt; VAT rates, then the VAT rates need to be changed with the preferred one. After completing this the users should be able to enjoy the new VAT rates seamlessly within Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add Tax invoice in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Taxes are one of the most important factors associated with business. Hence, it is necessary to manage all the business related taxes error free. Keeping a record of tax invoices is one of the most effective method of managing all the taxes. This can be performed easily with Tactic.  Adding Tax invoices in tactic can be performed with the combination of a few small steps. The very first step of adding tax invoices in Tactic is associated with visiting Home -&amp;gt; Company/Organisation -&amp;gt; enable taxes as per choice. Tactic allows the users to add up to three different Taxes. After enabling the Taxes the users will be able to enjoy the Tax invoice in the Billing module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Third Party module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add native languages for third-parties?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this Multilanguage settings the users can easily change the default language of their customers and third parties. For activating the Multilanguage settings the users need to go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Display -&amp;gt; Enable Multilanguage support for customer or vendor relationships -&amp;gt; Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the option to use Multilanguage settings seamlessly. The users then need select a default language for the third-parties. For enabling a default language for the third-parties, the users need to follow the steps: (For an already created third party) Third party menu -&amp;gt; List of Customers/Prospects/Vendors -&amp;gt; Click on the desired third party -&amp;gt; Modify -&amp;gt; Language default -&amp;gt; Choose the preferred language -&amp;gt; Save or (For a new third party) Third party menu -&amp;gt; New Customers/Prospects/Vendors -&amp;gt; Fill all the important information -&amp;gt; Language default -&amp;gt; Choose the preferred language -&amp;gt; Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Tickets Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add Tickets from public interface?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tickets are a helpful object that can assist the users in seeking help from the Tactic team regarding several issues. [[Tickets_Module|Tickets]] can be created from inside of Tactic and it can also be created by a public interface. Creating tickets from public interface allow the users to connect with the Tactic team without having to log-into Tactic. For creating tickets from public interface the users need to activate the ticket module at first. For activating the ticket module the users require to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/ Applications -&amp;gt; Tickets -&amp;gt; Activate the module -&amp;gt; Click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; Public interface tab -&amp;gt; Activate -&amp;gt; there will be a URL visible on the page as &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“A public interface requiring no identification is available at the following URL”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -&amp;gt; The users can copy this URL for future use -&amp;gt; or click on this URL -&amp;gt; The public interface of Ticket creation will be visible -&amp;gt; Create ticket -&amp;gt; Enter all the important information -&amp;gt; New ticket. After completing this procedure the users’ public interface ticket will be ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for User module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to reset admin password?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For changing or resetting the admin password the users need to go to the users section and choose the admin profile. After viewing the admin profile the users need to click on the option of modify and type the new password on the blank area of password. The steps to reach to admin profile are, Home-&amp;gt; User and groups (from the vertical menu bar) -&amp;gt; click on the admin profile from the users list. For changing the admin password go to Modify -&amp;gt; type new password on the blank password area -&amp;gt; Save. Upon saving the modifications the users will be able to rest the admin password easily. For more details you can visit User Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can we limit the access of warehouses from user permission feature?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, the users can limit the access of warehouse from the user permission section of Tactic. Tactic is designed to be used with numerous users under an ultimate admin. The admin decides how much permission to be provided to the users. Hence, it is certainly possible to limit the access of warehouse from Tactic by using user permission set-up. For accomplishing this the users need to go the specific user, whose permissions need to be modified and then go to the section of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[User_Permission|User permission]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the horizontal menu. The list of granted permissions will be visible, from which the users need to find the Stock module and deactivate the permissions related to warehouse. In this way the permissions of warehouses can be limited. However, the users need to remember that there is no way of limiting the access of certain warehouses while granting permissions of other ones. If the permissions are deactivated then the users will be unable to access all of the warehouses and if the permissions are given then the users will be able to access each and every warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic provide the option of customer log-in to update them about their invoices, orders and other important factors?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The users can certainly provide their customer with an option of logging into Tactic with the feature of external user. An external user is the person who is not included within the company. For creating an external user, the user need to create a third-party contact at first. Third party contacts can be created following a few steps: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Third-Party menu (from the main menu bar) -&amp;gt; Contacts/Addresses -&amp;gt; New contacts/addresses -&amp;gt; fill all the mandatory criteria -&amp;gt; Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. After clicking the add options a new contact will be created. Upon creation of the new contact the users will be able to see an option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; under the contact card. The users can transform that contact into a user by clicking on the create user option. There will be a pop up on the page showing the log-in credentials of that external user. The users then need to tap on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;validate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. After validating that contact will be made into an external user. The users then can limit their access from User permission section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Multicurrency Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to set-up automatic change of currency from another currency while drafting an invoice/ How to add multicurrency option in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For enabling the option of multicurrency, the users need to go to the multicurrency module, which can be reached by visiting Home -&amp;gt; set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Multicurrency_Module|Multicurrency module]] from the option of Multi-module tools. The users then need to tap on the cog icon that appears on the left of the activation key. Upon clicking on the cog icon the users will be redirected to the settings page of multicurrency. The list of already added currencies will appear under the list, above which a drop down menu of all the available currencies will appear on the left side. The users need to choose their preferred currencies from the list while adding the conversion rate of the new currency from the main currency. For example, if the users have INR set-up as their main currency and what to add USD as new currency then the user need to add the rate of USD that equals 1 INR on the blank &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; box.  After adding the rate the users need to tap the option called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. With the completion of the process the users will be successful in adding the new currencies easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Miscellaneous Activities ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can Tactic help your business to grow?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is a paid ERP &amp;amp; CRM software that is designed to ease the manual effort of the business organizations. Tactic is integrated with the help of some modules, which are also the features of the ERP &amp;amp; CRM product. These modules have been constructed keeping consideration of all the business related needs that may be faced by the business operators. Tactic can manage almost every element that is usually associated with a company, such as HRM, accounts, finances, projects, customers, vendors and many more. Hence, it is quite obvious that Tactic can eliminate most of the manual effort as well as can enhance the workflow of an organization by leaving no room for errors. Additionally, Tactic provides a much safer and secure interface to manage data within. Therefore, it is needless to say that Tactic improves business elements, which eventually leads towards a potential and positive growth of business. So, yes, using Tactic will certainly help you in growing your business effectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;What are the mandatory configurations or steps need to be done after first login at Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is sold as a complete admin package. There are some of the mandatory steps that need to be performed by the users before starting to work with Tactic. After logging into Tactic the very first thing that the users need to do is setting up the software as per their needs and requirements. Tactic is integrated with some modules, so, for setting up the software the users need to set up the modules first. For setting up the modules, the admin users need to visit &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Upon clicking on the Modules/Applications sections, the users will be able to see the module boxes, the activating button can be turned on to activate a module and can be turned off to deactivate the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to make permissions work in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There are a total of 75 modules presented in Tactic. The admin users need to activate the modules based on their requirements. The User and group module will be activated by default as it cannot be deactivated. After activating the modules the users need to modify their admin username and passwords as per their preferences (the procedure of resetting admin password has been discussed in another question). After completing the procedure the admin users need to create other users while giving them required permissions. &lt;br /&gt;
The importance in permission lies in the fact that the users can only access to the module that they are provided the permission of. The other modules will remain inaccessible to them. For example, the HR manager of the company has nothing to do with the accounts. Hence, the admins can avoid permitting them to the accosting module. Therefore, the HR manager will not be able to access to the accounting module. This is how the permission feature of Tactic works for the benefit of the users and the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to collect log-in credentials for Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is a paid software that requires authentic credentials for starting to work with it. Hence, it is only natural for the software to ask for log-in credentials right after being installed or purchased. The initial log-in credentials will be provided to the valid registered email address of the customer. These log-in credentials can be changed later as per your preferences. If the users are unable to find the log-in credentials, then they need to check their registered emails’ inboxes. If the users cannot find the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Welcome Guide Mail from Tactic&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, then they should check their spam boxes in order to find the mail that contains initial log-in credentials. The users should mark it as safe and add support@alsoft.org  as a contact for future emails to deliver directly in users’ inbox or contact us.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to reset admin password?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For changing or resetting the admin password the users need to go to the users section and choose the admin profile. After viewing the admin profile the users need to click on the option of modify and type the new password on the blank area of password. The steps to reach to admin profile are, Home-&amp;gt; User and groups (from the vertical menu bar) -&amp;gt; click on the admin profile from the users list. For changing the admin password go to Modify -&amp;gt; type new password on the blank password area -&amp;gt; Save. Upon saving the modifications the users will be able to rest the admin password easily. For more details you can visit User Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a NextCloud integration within Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For this moment Tactic does not provide a NextCloud integration. However, there is a method, which can help the users in integrating NextCloud with Tactic. This method encourages enabling the DAV module within Tactic. Upon enabling the DAV module the users need to add the same in NextCloud as an external storage. This will allow the users in transferring files from Tactic to NextCloud seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there an addition of balance sheet and income statement in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic does not provide a balance sheet and income statement feature embedded within it. Tactic developers can develop a module for generating balance sheet and income statement if the majority of the customers require the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to change default time zone in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For changing the default time zone the users do not even need to go outside of Tactic. Changing in default time zone and adding preferable time zone can be easily accomplished by the users. The very first step of completing this process is visiting Home-&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; [[Other_setup|Other Setup]]. The users will be able to find a list of configuration options upon clicking on the other setup. At the Other Setup page users can see a table having fields called, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name, Value, Comment and Modify date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users need to add &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SERVER_TZ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the place of name and the name of the nation or time zone in the area of value. The area of comment need to be fulfilled inputting &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Corrected Timezone Parameter&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. For available list of Time Zones users may visit [[Tactic_Time-zones|Tactic time Zones]]. Lastly the users need to click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. The corrected time zone will work in Tactic after completing this step.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there an inventory available for the warehouses in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic has certainly been designed to reduce manual efforts of the users with the help of digitisation. We understand that inventory is an integrated part of warehouse management. However, for current version Tactic is unable to provide an inventory settings as it takes a good amount of time and Tactic developers could not wait to reduce the manual efforts of the organisations and business operators during this era of pandemic. Hence, we are looking into it and our developers are working quite hard to provide the customers with an inventory management system in Tactic later versions.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can the PDF templates be modified?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic already has some default PDF templates, with which the invoices, the expense reports and other important documents are generated. However, the already added PDF templates may not be ideal and standard for the users always. Hence, for giving the full authority of using Tactic as easily as the users like, the Tactic developers have provided the facility of modifying PDF templates. For modifying PDF templates the users need to go to any module that has the feature of PDF generation (e.g. Invoice module). The user need to follow some steps, which are: Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Customer_Invoice_Module|Invoice module]] -&amp;gt; Click on the cog sign that appears at the right side of the Module box -&amp;gt; from the set-up page of Invoice, the users need to go the section of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice documents models&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -&amp;gt; Turn on the option of ODT/ODS templates -&amp;gt; Upload the modified template from the upload section. The users will be able to use their modified PDF templates after uploading the new template. While generating PDF they only need to change the default PDF template by clicking on the dropdown menu and choosing their modified template.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic allow customer portal plugin?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For now, Tactic does not provide a customer portal plugin. However, the tactic developers will look forward to design a plugin if the customer requirements are high.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can extra fields be computed in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Extra fields can certainly be computed in Tactic. However, for proceeding with the procedure the users requires to possess a good command over programming, otherwise computing extra fields are almost impossible. As it is a developing based job, the users need to contact the experts through Tactic forum to get the job done. Hence, if the users need to compute extra fields they can contact the Tactic team by dropping a mail at &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the registered email ID. However, the users need to remember that it is a paid service, for which the users need to pay extra.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can I change the name of a menu item?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As it is known that Tactic is used by customers belonging from different nations and having different language or different accent of same language, there can be some of the elements within Tactic, which are referred differently. Such as commercial proposals are called quota in India. Hence, keeping the consideration of the users who might look forward to change the name of the menus, Tactic has provided an easy interface to change the names of the menu. For modifying the name of the menu the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Menu, then change the menu handler to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;auguria_menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The user then need to put the new name of the menu in the criteria of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Title&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users will be able to change the name by saving the new title easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a method of adding automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders? If there is a way then how can I accomplish this easily?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As Tactic has been designed for increasing the convenience of the users it is certainly possible for the users to add automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders. For adding automatic terms and conditions the user only have to add those terms and conditions to the public note area and it will be visible in the PDF version of the invoice, contract or proposals. For adding public note the user need to open that invoice/contract/proposal and then click on modify to add public note from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Upon adding the note the users will be able to see the public note visible in their invoice/contract/proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a multi-company module available in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is initially designed to be managed only one company and there is no feature in the basic version of Tactic to manage more than one companies. However, it is not at all an impossible addition. Multi-company module can be added as a customisation request. For adding the Multi-company module the users to drop a mail at support@alsoft.org for this paid service. It is important for the users to drop the mail only from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact them within 48 hour and let the users know about the preparation of adding Multi-company module to their Tactic account.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add line number on product, shipment, contact, orders, third parties etc. in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The contacts, orders, third parties, shipments etc. in Tactic is integrated with several lines. Without adding those lines it is impossible to validate the shipments, contacts and other important objects. However, the default settings of Tactic does not show line numbers in those areas. Hence, the users need to go through a small process for adding line product, shipment, contact, orders, third parties etc. in Tactic.  For achieving this the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Other setup -&amp;gt; add &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_VIEW_LINE_NUMBER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the place of name -&amp;gt; add 1 at the place of value -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the users will be able to see line numbers in product, shipment, contact, orders, third parties etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can I change the date format?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The default date format of Tactic depends on the language set-up itself. Tactic will show the date format according to the selected language. For example, if the default language is set as English US then the date format will be as the MM/DD/YY. The default date format of Tactic can be changed by going to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Display and changing the language to the native language. For an example if the users change the default language to English India, then the default dating format will be DD/MM/YY. However, if the users are still not able to change in date format then they can easily take assistance from the Tactic team. For achieving assistance the users need to drop a mail at support@alsoft.org. It should be remembered by the users that they need to drop mail from their registered email ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;What should I do if I cannot log into Tactic from my IP address?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There is almost zero chances of such an error to occur with Tactic. Our customers are our first priority and no error can happen with their IP addresses. However, if the users still face difficulties in logging into their Tactic account through a specific IP address then the users should contact Tactic support team. The users can drop their mails at support@alsoft.org by their registered email ID. The Tactic team will contact the users within 48 hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;What does “Expired security token” mean and how to solve it?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For understanding expired security token, it is important to understand the meaning of security token at first as well as its importance in ERP &amp;amp; CRM software. Tactic uses a CSRF token, Cross Site Request Forgery, for safe guarding users’ data. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cross Site Request Forgery&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is one kind of malicious activity that are performed by implementing unauthorized commands on behalf of an authorized user. Hence, for preventing such malicious activities and for saving the data of the users Tactic uses a CSRF token, here the token stands for an active user session that is managed by Tactic. This token makes sure that the activities are performed by the users themselves and not by any unauthorized user. Hence, expired security token stands for expired user session. Tactic sends this messages when the user session is expired and some kind of activities are still being performed within Tactic. &lt;br /&gt;
Solving this issue is not something complicated. When the users face these type of issues they can try to clear their browser cache to resolve this issue. It is most likely to be solved after cache clearance. However, if the users still face the same issues then they can contact the Tactic support by dropping a mail at: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can I change the logo from the log-in page?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is designed for increasing the efficiency and workflow of the organisations. And increase in workflow and efficiency certainly deserves a good appearance, to attract the third parties, such as customers, vendors, stakeholders and more. When the third-parties log-into Tactic as an external user, they need to be welcomed by the company, which is virtually possible by showing the company logo along with a welcome messages. All of these can be added in Tactic manually by following a few steps. The users need to go to company or organisation settings from set-up and add the company logo at the field of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company logo&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users will be able to see their company logo as a favicon at the log-in page.  The users can also add specific messages in the area of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Message of the Day&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; area.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to connect a VPN to Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting a VPN to Tactic is quite easy, the users do not have to perform any extra configuration. For connecting the VPN the users only need to install the VPN software and then run it. After connecting the PC to the VPN the users need to type Tactic URL in the browser. Then log-in into Tactic with appropriate credentials. If Tactic opens normally then the VPN is successfully connected to the software. If it does not then the users need to check their bowser settings and modify those if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to change maximum size of uploading files in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The users have been provided with the facility of uploading their important business related files within Tactic for enhancing their experience of using Tactic as a compact ERP &amp;amp; CRM service. There is a limit of maximum size for uploading file, which have been set by Tactic. However, we understand that the users may need to increase the size limit since important files can be bigger than the maximum size. Hence, Tactic allows the users to change the limit for maximum size of uploading files as per their preferences. For changing the maximum size of uploading files the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Security -&amp;gt; Files (upload). The users then will be able to see the parameters of the maximum size of uploading files. A maximum of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;40960 Kb&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is allowed by default, the users can change the value to any size keeping consideration of the (web server upload limit) limit. After clicking the option of modify the users can easily use the new maximum size of file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to allow any or rich HTML content inside the Tactic WYSIWYG editor?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic comes with an integrated CMS (Content Management System), which allows you to manage your website content right from Tactic’s interface without having to opt for a third-party software. Hence, very naturally, you can find a WYSIWYG editor for editing content and so on. However, Tactic restricts you from adding rich HTML or any kind of HTML content by default. For changing this setting, you need to add a global key to the other setup of your Tactic ERP and CRM software. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For adding the same you need to follow a few steps. At first you need to access &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Other Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Once the other setup page opens, you will get to see a table containing various keys and values. Under the criterion ‘name’ you need to put down &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“FCKEDITOR_ALLOW_ANY_CONTENT”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and then under value put down a 1. You can add comment as per your liking. Once you are done doing so, click on “Add”. Your key will be added to Tactic ERP and CRM. Now you can easily add rich or any HTML content in Tactic’s WYSIWYG editor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any time you want to turn it off, just change the value from 1 to 0 and Tactic will start restricting HTML content again.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3639</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3639"/>
		<updated>2024-11-30T11:18:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; Tactic is an all-in-one cloud based solution for ERP and CRM related services. This paid Software as a Service is capable of serving large corporations, medium enterprises, small companies, proprietorships, and non-profit organisations as well as freelancing units. The software has an integration of 73 modules, which meet all the organisational needs while enhancing performance with its analytical features. Primary features of Tactic includes sales management, human resource management, financial management, employee management and etc. Tactic includes a REST API that allows users to integrate with third-party applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= ABOUT TACTIC ERP &amp;amp; CRM =&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:Tactic-logo-updated.png|center|link=What is TACTIC ? Why TACTIC]] [[What is TACTIC ? Why TACTIC]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:tactic-services.png|center|link=TACTIC&amp;#039;s Services]] [[TACTIC&amp;#039;s Services]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:localization.png|center|link=TACTIC Localization]] [[TACTIC Localization]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:email-marketing.png|center|link=Email Marketing]] [[Email Marketing]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:tactic-resources.png|center|link=Resources]] [[Tactic Resources]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= TACTIC ERP &amp;amp; CRM MANAGEMENT=&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:Hr-management.png|center|link=Human Relationship Management (HR)]] [[Human Relationship Management (HR)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:Project-management.png|center|link=Project Management]] [[Project Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:Vendor-management.png|center|link=Vendor Management]] [[Vendor Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:Billing-system.png|center|link=Billing System]] [[Billing System]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:Lead-management.png|center|link=Lead Management]] [[Lead Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= TACTIC&amp;#039;s PROMISES =&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:security-management.png|center|link=Security Management]] [[Security Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:opportunities-management.png|center|link=Opportunities Management]] [[Opportunities Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:tactic-payment.png|center|link=Tactic Payment]] [[Tactic Payment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:tactic-clients-support.png|center|link=Tactic Clients Support]] [[Tactic Clients Support]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:purchase-order-management.png|center|link=Purchase Order Management]] [[Purchase Order Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Other_setup&amp;diff=3638</id>
		<title>Other setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Other_setup&amp;diff=3638"/>
		<updated>2024-11-30T10:43:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
Usually these setup options are not visible in the interface, as most of the times these options are not needed by the users. Using these options can affect the performance of the software. For enabling these options you need to go to the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home ► Setup ► Other Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. These options are more unlikely to be documented since these are not the stable options but experimental. For overwriting the parameters you need to define the constant name and then set it as 1. The list is presented below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Other_setup_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Other_setup_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Global Configuration Keys=&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADD_UNSPLASH_LOGIN_BACKGROUND:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option, the background image of every log-in page can be refreshed. The log-in background image will be pulled in from the open-source image website called Unsplash. If you already have a background image saved for your Tactic, then it will be overwritten, however, it will not be deleted or removed from database. If you use this settings there will be a risk of your credentials to be stolen from external websites. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_APPLICATION_TITLE: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the main application title with the help of this menu. You can name your software anything you want. However, you need to remember that changing the main application name can lead to failure in version detection as well as can face difficulty in being used in smartphones. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_AUTOFILL_DATE: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to autofill the date of orders, invoices, proposals and payments. If there is any other constant other than 0 the documents will be auto-filled with current date. Tactic recommends the user not to enable this feature as it can create a lot of errors in data input without any validation from the users. This also leads towards saving incorrect value, which messes up the accountancy reports. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_AUTO_TIMESTAMP_IN_PUBLIC_NOTES: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to add a timestamp and user at the end of the public note. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_AUTO_TIMESTAMP_IN_PRIVATE_NOTES: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to add a timestamp and user at the end of the private note.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_DEFAULT_PAYMENT_TERM_ID: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can set a main default payment term that will be used in all of your documents afterwards. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_DEFAULT_PAYMENT_TYPE_ID: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can set a main default payment type that will be applied with all of your payments afterwards.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_DEFAULT_LANGUAGE_FILTER: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can easily hide the en_US language option in combo boxes, since you can easily remove other languages but not en_US. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_LANGUAGES_ALLOWED: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can define the main languages and only the defined ones will show up on the combo boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_DISABLE_NOTES_TAB: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not like to see the notes tab in the card pages, you can easily hide the same with the help of this option. You can also turn it on anytime you want without any difficulties. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_CONTACTS_TAB: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not like to see the contacts tab in the card pages, you can easily hide the same with the help of this option. You can also turn it on anytime you want without any difficulties.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_FULL_SCANLIST: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can disable the complete scan of tables for allowing the pagination to show the number of pages in total. This option can actually be useful for holding the records to huge data, such as tables with more than 2 000 000 records.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_JQUERY_JNOTIFY: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can disable the error notification of JQuery with the help of this option. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_AJAX_COMBOX:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a large number of third parties and products that your company hold, you are probably in the need of disabling the autocomplete features. You can achieve the same with the help of this option but setting the constant to 1. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_MULTIPLE_FILEUPLOAD:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature prevents the users from uploading multiple files at once. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_TRUNC:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature helps in disabling all the truncings in the select list. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLEDRAFTSTATUS:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to remove the “draft” status for some of the objects, such as the projects and donations. By enabling this option you can create these objects directly in the validated state. However, you will not be able to do any correction anymore. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DOC_USE_OBJECT_THIRDPARTY_NAME:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can add a thirdparty name at the beginning of your document while it is generating. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DOC_USE_TIMING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this option will help you in generating documents with timestamp. The value of the timestamp need to be in the timestamp format, such as %Y%m%d%H%M (only for ODT files). &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DOC_UPLOAD_NOT_RENAME_BY_DEFAULT: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can disable the automatic renaming feature of the uploaded documents with the help of this option. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ENABLE_LOG_TO_HTML:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By defining this constant it will be possible to have logs inside pages. You need to add a 1 to the parameter &amp;amp; logtohtml=1 into URL.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ENABLE_IMPORT_LINKED_OBJECT_LINES:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to import important lines from the compatible documents that are linked to the current document. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_FIRST_TO_UPPER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature adds an uppercase to the first letter of the names of members, contact and third parties if it has not been added already. However, there are languages, which differ while using an uppercase. Hence, in the regard of those languages, your data can be altered. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ALL_TO_UPPER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature adds an uppercase to the first letter of the names of members, contact and third parties if it has not been added already. However, there are languages, which differ while using an uppercase. Hence, in the regard of those languages, your data can be altered.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ALL_TOWN_TO_UPPER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature adds an uppercase to the first letter of the names of members, contact and third parties if it has not been added already.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_FILESYSTEM_ENCODING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With some PHP versions, PHP is not able to detect the page code for filesystem of the server OS. To solve this, assumes your OS filesystem is UTF-8 if on Linux or OSX system, and ISO-8859-1 if on Windows. If not, for example on a Windows server with a NTFS UTF-8 pagecode, you can set the variable MAIN_FILESYSTEM_ENCODING to &amp;quot;utf-8&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_FORCELANGDIR:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a relative path that holds on to the custom language folder. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_HTML_TITLE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to control the formatting of the html title page. If there is a &amp;#039;noapp&amp;#039; key in the field of the value then the name of the application will not be the output. If there is a &amp;#039;thirdpartynameonly&amp;#039; key in the field of the value there will be only the names of the third party as output. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_HELPCENTER_LINKTOUSE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to define the link for &amp;quot;I need help&amp;quot; link in the log-in page. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_LANDING_PAGE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to choose the landing page right after you log-in to Tactic. Please note that this option works as a global option and it is per user option. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_LOGOUT_GOTO_URL:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature will redirect you to your desired page after you logout of Tactic. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAXTABS_IN_CARD:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust the maximum number of tabs that are visible in the cards with the help of this option. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAXLIST_OVERLOAD:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust the maximum number lines that are visible in the space’s domain with the help of this option.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MIN_NB_ENABLED_MODULE_FOR_WARNING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used for showing a warning when the setup of modules have not been completed or is lower or equal to the provided value.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_NO_CONCAT_DESCRIPTION:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to use only custom description in the lines of proposals or invoices or orders. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ONLY_LOGIN_ALLOWED:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to allow only a specific login to be allowed to log into Tactic. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_OPTIMIZE_SPEED:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to optimise the speed of Tactic. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PROPAGATE_CONTACTS_FROM_ORIGIN:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to create contracts, order and invoices from other objects with some specified contacts. Hence, when you create a new objects the contacts are automatically specified without any manual interference. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PUBLIC_NOTE_IN_ADDRESS:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can show your public note in address block. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_REMOVE_INSTALL_WARNING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove all security warnings that appear to administrator users if URL /install is public. You should solve the problem if warning occurs, instead of removing the warning! For this, create a file called install.lock into Tactic root directory. This will stop the warning but also make the page /install not possible to use, to protect your installation.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_REPEATCONTACTONEACHTAB:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to add contacts on all of the available tabs. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_REPLACE_TRANS_xx_XX:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
You can replace a string of language with the help of this option. When the value is string1:newstring1;string2:newstring2, you need to replace string1 with newstring1 and the translation for the language will be done. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ROUNDOFTOTAL_NOT_TOTALOFROUND:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to change the rounding total of TTC lines. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SERVER_TZ:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up this constant will be helpful in having a correct timezone setup without any mistakes. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SEARCH_FORM_ON_HOME_AREAS:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to show search forms on the home page for the most important modules or the core modules. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SEARCHFORM_SUPPLIER_INVOICE_DISABLED:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to disable the search form for the supplier invoice. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SEARCH_DIRECT_OPEN_IF_ONLY_ONE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can be directly taken to the search item when the search result is only one. Disabling this will show the search item in the list even when it is the only one.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SERVICES_ARE_ECOMMERCE_200238EC:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature uses the VAT of the country when the seller and the buyer are in Europe and buyer is not a company. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SHOW_TUNING_INFO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add tuning information into javascript console. Better when xdebug is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SHOW_TECHNICAL_ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this will show the technical IDs on element cards. Please remember that this feature is not supported everywhere. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SHOWDATABASENAMEINHELPPAGESLINK:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to show the name of the database in the upper help menu. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_ALTERNATE_TRANSLATION_FOR:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option shows a list for the objects that require an alternate translation. Such as, &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_ALTERNATE_TRANSLATION_FOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Societal: name, town &lt;br /&gt;
Contact: first-name, last-name&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_HOURMIN_IN_DATE_RANGE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add hours and minutes to the entities lines along with “date start” and “date end”. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_JQUERY_JEDITABLE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allow to update from screen, directly into database, some properties of elements (invoices, proposals, ...) using Ajax. This make response time faster, but avoid using this feature, because it bypasses some business actions (updates on other data that should be done consistently) and ignores business controls on data you saved. Consequently this feature breaks consistency of data and possibly the stability of the software.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_JQUERY_MULTISELECT:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allow to use Ajax when a choice that require multiselect is used (for the moment only external modules uses select box with multiselect values). Set the value to the jQuery plugin name to use (multiselect, multiple-select, select2…). Setting it to any other value will result in unwanted side-effects and/or bugs.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_OLD_SEARCH_FORM:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to display the old search form in the left menu. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_VAT_DEFAULT_IF_AUTODETECT_FAILS:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to force a VAT rate to a given value when the auto-detection fails or the VAT rate of the product is not given.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_VAT_COMPANIES_IN_EEC_WITH_INVALID_VAT_ID_ARE_INDIVIDUAL:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature processes a buyer company as an individual when they are from Europe and do not have an intracommunautaire VAT ID. Please note that this must be implemented into the accountancy module instead of being set to 1. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_VAT_OF_PRODUCT_FOR_INDIVIDUAL_CUSTOMER_OUT_OF_EEC:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is used to use the default vat of the products for every individual customer that are not included in European Economic Community. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_VIEW_LINE_NUMBER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows the show of a line number for each line of every object. However, the line numbers are shown only on screen not on PDF.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_VIEW_LINE_NUMBER_IN_LIST:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This features allows to show line number in the lists on screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_VOLUME_DEFAULT_ROUND:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to set an accuracy of volume (number of decimals)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_VOLUME_DEFAULT_UNIT:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to set up a default unit for weight (0=kg, -3=g)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_WEIGHT_DEFAULT_ROUND:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to set an accuracy of weight (number of decimals)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_WEIGHT_DEFAULT_UNIT:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to set an accuracy of weight (number of decimals)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USER_HIDE_INACTIVE_IN_COMBOBOX:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can hide the inactive users in the combobox. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_PDF_THUMBS:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While enabled this feature disables thumbs in PDF to prevent image related bugs. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_KEEP_REF_CUSTOMER_ON_CLONING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can keep the customer reference on cloned objects, such as proposals and invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DONT_KEEP_NOTE_ON_CLONING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can remove the object notes during cloning. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DOC_SORT_FIELD:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature helps you in setting the default sorting field on document page, name by default pattern will be used. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DOC_SORT_ORDER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature helps you in setting the default sorting order (ASC or DESC) on document page (ASC by default). &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_ZIPTOWN_DICTIONNARY:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature lets you use dictionary ZIP for creating a card.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_TOP_MENU_SEARCH_DROPDOWN:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature shows search in top menu with theme eldy. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PHONE_SEPAR:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Separ phone number other space. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GRAPH_USE_FISCAL_YEAR:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enable this feature widgets will use fiscal year. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOW_SOCINFO_ON_PRINT:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to add user company information on each printed document (when click on Tactic print button)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_FEATURES_LEVEL: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature defines the level of features to show: &lt;br /&gt;
1= stable + deprecated, &lt;br /&gt;
0=stable only (default), &lt;br /&gt;
1= stable + experimental, &lt;br /&gt;
2= stable + experimental + development&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MAIN_SHOW_TECHNICAL_ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature allows you to show technical id for object.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_HTTP_CONTENT_SECURITY_POLICY:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature allows you to fill in the content security rules.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_ON_SEARCH_AND_LIST_GO_ON_CUSTOMER_OR_SUPPLIER_CARD:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature allows you to change the link of the third party to customer/supplier card instead of contact card on List.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MODULE_SETUP_ON_LIST_BY_DEFAULT:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to show the list by default when it is set to &amp;quot;common&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PAGESIZE_CHOICES:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can configure select field to choose number of lines displayed on listing (10:10, 15:15, 20:20, 30:30, 40:40, 50:50,100:100,250:250,500:500, 1000:1000, 5000:5000).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_TOP_MENU_QUICKADD_DROPDOWN:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add a dropdown menu with shortcuts to create new objects. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_EMAILCOLLECTOR_MAIL_WITHOUT_HEADER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can remove the header stored by email collector. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_VAT_OF_PRODUCT_FOR_COMPANIES_IN_EEC_WITH_INVALID_VAT_ID_MAIN_OPTIMIZEFORTEXTBROWSER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature helps you in optimising interface for a text only browser. This variable is set to 1 automatically if your browser is lynx or links. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_NB_OF_YEAR_IN_WIDGET_GRAPH:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the number of years visible on some graph of some widgets (2 is default value) with the help of this option. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_CREATEFROM_KEEP_LINE_ORIGIN_INFORMATION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;API_DISABLE_LOGIN_API&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_LOGIN_BADCHARUNAUTHORIZED:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature adds possibility to define bad character unauthorized into login name REGEX expression. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SHOW_ALL_FILES_ON_DOCUMENT_TOOLTIP:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to add all files visible from the object to be visible from the list of object.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_LOGIN_BADCHARUNAUTHORIZED:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a warning related to incorporation of bad character during login. For adding this setup, the users need to follow a few steps, which are Home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; other setup -&amp;gt; add MAIN_LOGIN_BADCHARUNAUTHORIZED in the place of name-&amp;gt; add 1 as value -&amp;gt; click on add. The setup will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_CHECKBOX_LEFT_COLUMN:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For shifting checkboxes to the left column, you need to access Tactic other setup by going to home -&amp;gt; setup (from the side menu) -&amp;gt; other setup -&amp;gt; input ‘MAIN_CHECKBOX_LEFT_COLUMN’ under name criterion and 1 under value criterion -&amp;gt; click on add. &lt;br /&gt;
Your checkboxes should shift to the left column once you are done following all the steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GRANDTOTAL_LIST_SHOW:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Add this constant to the setup for always showing the grand totals of anything applicable in the list. This setup can make it easy for you to gain knowledge about the total price without having to open the specific card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Security Options =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SECURITY_ANTI_SSRF_SERVER_IP:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this module you can set a complete list of IPs of server.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SECURITY_CSRF_WITH_TOKEN:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activate a second anti-CSRF protection on POST (so a POST from another web site can&amp;#039;t be done). Note there is already a default protection using test on referrer. This second protection uses TOKEN on forms and is more powerful. ► (v5.0+)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MODULES_FOR_EXTERNAL:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to limit available modules for external users. By default value is &amp;#039;facture,commande,contact,propal,projet,contrat,societe,ficheinter,expedition,agenda&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ALLOW_SVG_FILES_AS_IMAGES: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can use SVG file as image files. However, you need to remember that this may introduce security vulnerability (javascript can be embedded into SVG file).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_RESTRICTHTML_ONLY_VALID_HTML: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of activation of this feature you can refuse parameter if value is not a valid HTML content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_RESTRICTHTML_REMOVE_ALSO_BAD_ATTRIBUTES: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sanitize also non-standard attributes on HTML content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SECURITY_CSRF_WITH_TOKEN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option helps in enhancing anti-CSRF protection. Set the value to 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Accountancy Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ACCOUNTANCY_COMBO_FOR_AUX: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to add graphic features to your accountancy module. However, you need to know that activating this option can slow down or even freeze accountancy feature. It is most likely to happen when you have a large number of third parties. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ACCOUNTING_DEFAULT_NOT_NOTIFIED_VALIDATION_DATE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can avoid validating the lines with accountancy export. If the constant is set to 1, the box will be left unchecked by default. If the constant is set to 0 the box will be checked by default. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ACCOUNTING_DEFAULT_NOTIFIED_EXPORT_DATE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can avoid flagging the lines with accountancy export. If the constant is set to 1, the box will be left unchecked by default. If the constant is set to 0 the box will be checked by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Agenda Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AGENDA_ALL_CALENDARS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can change the default view of the calendar pages to see all the agendas that have been created by you as well as by others. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AGENDA_AUTOSET_END_DATE_WITH_DELTA_HOURS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to automatically set end date of event to start date + delta on event creation page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AGENDA_DISABLE_LOCATION:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can disable location field in action card.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AGENDA_MAX_EVENTS_DAY_VIEW:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature of Tactic lets you define the maximum number of visible entries for each day in agenda. Default value is 3. Value 0 means no limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AGENDA_USE_EVENT_TYPE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to add a mandatory field &amp;quot;Type&amp;quot; when creating an event (deprecated).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ADD_EVENT_ON_ELEMENT_CARD: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can create an event from a document (proposal, order, and invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AGENDA_SUPPORT_PRIORITY_IN_EVENTS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can add priorities in events. &lt;br /&gt;
= Bank Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANK_CAN_RECONCILIATE_CASHACCOUNT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature will let your bank reconcile cash accounts. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANK_DISABLE_CHECK_DEPOSIT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature lets you disable check deposit feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANK_ASK_PAYMENT_BANK_DURING_ORDER:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this you can ask bank account during creation of an order. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANK_ASK_PAYMENT_BANK_DURING_PROPOSAL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this you can ask bank account during creation of a proposal. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANK_USE_OLD_VARIOUS_PAYMENT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to enter miscellaneous payments (not covered by other modules) using old method. Deprecated. Entering various payment is preferred.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_IBAN_IS_NEVER_MANDATORY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can make IBAN and BIC information not mandatory. &lt;br /&gt;
= BOM and MO Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLOW_USE_KITS_INTO_BOM_AND_MO_BOM_SUB_BOM: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this module you can allow to add a BOM in another BOM. &lt;br /&gt;
= Inalterable Log Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BLOCKEDLOG_ADD_ACTIONS_SUPPORTED:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can complete list of triggered action that are logged. &lt;br /&gt;
= Contracts =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONTRACT_SUPPORT_PRODUCTS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature will allow you to have products also suggested into module contract.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONTRACT_ALLOW_EXTERNAL_DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
= Cron module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CRON_DISABLE_KEY_CHANGE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you provide an instance to a customer, you probably also add an entry in the cron of this user so Tactic batch and scheduler can work correctly. For security purpose, it may have a security key that is inside the command line into the cron entry and this entry must match the value defined into Tactic setup (setup of module &amp;#039;Scheduled Jobs&amp;#039;). Because, a customer of a Saas platform will probably have no access to edit the cron file, it is also import that he has no way to edit the key into the Tactic setup, so the key in the cron command line will always match the key in Tactic setup, and the Tactic batches will executed without security errors. To be sure, the customer does not change the value, you can set this constant to 1 into the table Table_llx_const.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CRON_DISABLE_TUTORIAL_CRON:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable the tutorial about how to install the cron script. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CRON_WARNING_DELAY_HOURS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set this value to the frequency set for the cron script with the help of this option. When you enable this, a warning will be shown to user to warn it about max frequency of its scheduled jobs). &lt;br /&gt;
= Direct Debit Orders =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WITHDRAWAL_ALLOW_ANY_INVOICE_STATUS:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you enable this option. The list of all the invoices will be shown in the course of direct debit payment including the already paid invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
= Donation Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DONATION_USE_THIRDPARTIES: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the activation of this feature you can add a third party field to appear on donation forms.&lt;br /&gt;
=Email and SMS= &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAILFORM_DISABLE_ENTERKEY:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activate javascript code to disable the enter key in the MAIL form. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIL_PREFIX_FOR_EMAIL_ID: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add prefix for the mails ID. Default value is $_SERVER[&amp;quot;SERVER_NAME&amp;quot;] &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_DEBUG: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After activating this feature you can write content with header of last mail into file tactic_mail.log into directory tactic_main_data_root.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SMS_DEBUG: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of you can write content of SMS sent into file tactic_sms.log into directory tactic_main_data_root.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_ALLOW_SENDMAIL_F:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Linux or BSD system, PHP email function use the command sendmail local to server. In some cases, the sender email must be provided on command line of sendmail with option -f. This option is here to ask Tactic to call the function mail of PHP by adding value for the option -f. Note that in most cases, even with sendmail, sender email is correctly managed as it is added in the email technical header. This option is here only for rare setup of sendmail that ask the -f option to be mandatory or for sendmail setup that does not use by default the Return-path of header email to define the sender (with this option, the return-path will be provided also on command line and not lost by sendmail).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_SENDMAIL_FORCE_BA: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Linux or BSD system, PHP email function use the command sendmail local to server. In some case, we want to recipient to be provided to sendmail into the email content instead of its command line parameter. For this we must add the -ba parameter to sendmail. This option asks PHP to provide this parameter when sending a mail. Note that another solution is to edit the mail.force_extra_parameters=-ba into php.ini file.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_NO_FULL_EMAIL:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can clean Recipient email and sender are from form &amp;quot;&amp;lt;email&amp;gt;&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name &amp;lt;email&amp;gt;&amp;quot;. This might solve problem of compatibility with very old mailers.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_FIX_FOR_BUGGED_MTA: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some MTA agent are bugged and add some CR chars each time they saw a LF. Because Tactic emails are forged to be already cleaned, if MTA agent do that, you will send an email with two CR chars. This may result in having recipient not able to read your email. To fix this, add this constant to 1. Tactic will then create an email that is not RFC compliant but because the MTA agent is bugged, the email will be modified and become correct during sending, solving the problem of bad email received. Add this constant if your recipient experience problems when opening email for example users using webmail of orange.fr or hotmail.com&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_DO_NOT_USE_SIGN:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not want to add user signature at end of suggested pre-defined email you can activate this feature as it prevents the same from happening. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIL_FORCE_DELIVERY_RECEIPT_INVOICE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to set default as &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; on requesting delivery receipt when sending email through the Customer Invoice module, you can activate this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIL_FORCE_DELIVERY_RECEIPT_ORDER: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to set default as &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; on requesting delivery receipt when sending email through the Customer Order module, you can activate this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIL_FORCE_DELIVERY_RECEIPT_PROPAL:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to set default as &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; on requesting delivery receipt when sending email through the Customer Proposal module, you can activate this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIL_FORCE_DELIVERY_RECEIPT_SUPPLIER_PROPOSAL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to set default as &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; on requesting delivery receipt when sending email through the Supplier Proposal module, you can activate this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_EMAIL_USECCC: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting the constant to 1 allows Tactic to show field BCC into email forms, If email = Show BCC prefilled with email.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_AUTOCOPY_PROPOSAL_TO, MAIN_MAIL_AUTOCOPY_ORDER_TO, MAIN_MAIL_AUTOCOPY_INVOICE_TO: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can let Email to use as a BCC recipient when sending email for proposal, order or invoice. You can make this value visible by setting MAIN_EMAIL_USECCC (to 1 or to another email, see previous point)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_EMAIL_ADD_TRACK_ID:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When value is 1 (this is also default value if option is not set): The record &amp;quot;Message-id&amp;quot; added into smtp header includes a tracking id to define where the email was sent from. When value is 2: you send an email from third party card, the sender email is completed with the email source tracking string &amp;quot;+thiXXX&amp;quot; on email (your email will be sent with the &amp;quot;From&amp;quot; that is myname+thi123@mycompany.com). So when user receiving email will make &amp;quot;Answer&amp;quot;, email will be sent to myname@mycompany.com but with the tracking id included (into header or into target email), allowing you to know to which third party or object, the email exchange is related to.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIL_MAX_NB_OF_RECIPIENTS_IN_SAME_EMAIL:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can restrict sending of 1 email message to x recipients for same email message (x for To: + CC: + BCC:). If not defined, value is 10 by activating this feature. Required to fight against spamming that include 1000 recipients in 1 message. Note that MAIL_MAX_NB_OF_RECIPIENTS_TO_IN_SAME_EMAIL, MAIL_MAX_NB_OF_RECIPIENTS_CC_IN_SAME_EMAIL and MAIL_MAX_NB_OF_RECIPIENTS_BCC_IN_SAME_EMAIL are also available.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_FORCE_CONTENT_TYPE_TO_HTML: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can force to send all email (event with text only content) as HTML formatted email.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_USE_MULTI_PART:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can forge email content using an alternate text part. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_INFO_SOCIETE_MAIL_ALIASES:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add address aliases for the from field on mail. Set his value with with the help of this feature. &amp;quot;Firstname Name &amp;lt;firstname.lastname@mydomain.tld, Otherfirstname OtherlastName &amp;lt;othermail@mydomain.tld&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_ADD_INLINE_IMAGES_IF_IN_MEDIAS:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature allows Tactic to replace the &amp;quot;inline content&amp;quot; with images, if images were stored into the media directory from CKEditor. This may increase seriously risk of being detected as SPAM.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_COPY_FILE_IN_EVENT_AUTO: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add attachment document on event auto generated by sending email from Tactic with the help of this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_EXTERNAL_SMTP_CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set here the list of IPs where your Tactic instances are hosted. So when your customer go into the setup area of email:&lt;br /&gt;
If he chose mail method, a message will explain him how to setup its SPF record for its email domain (showing the list of IP). This is to avoid to have its emails, sent from its Tactic instance, fails due to strict antispam rule of some emailing servers.&lt;br /&gt;
If he chose smtp method, a message will explain him the list of IP he can use if there is restriction on IP by the SMTP agent. If you also need to add a message to help SPF setup, see option MAIN_EXTERNAL_SMTP_SPF_STRING_TO_ADD.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MAIL_ENABLED_USER_DEST_SELECT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature allows Tactic to show also internal users into list of recipients of email in email sending form. &lt;br /&gt;
= Emailing Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAILING_PREFIX_FOR_EMAIL_ID:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can set the value that will be used to compose the &amp;quot;Email ID&amp;quot; into email headers. When you set this value to &amp;#039;SERVER_NAME&amp;#039;, the virtual host of web server will be used. However, by default this is not defined, so a hash key, unique to each instance, is used.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAILING_NO_USING_PHPMAIL:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If set, the module emailing can&amp;#039;t be used with mail setup of &amp;quot;phpmail&amp;quot;. Using a thirdparty SMTP server is required. You can complete warning message by adding an email to contact for setup help with constant MAILING_SMTP_SETUP_EMAILS_FOR_QUESTIONS.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAILING_SMTP_SETUP_EMAILS_FOR_QUESTIONS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contains the email of contact to show into the message visible to a user when he try to use emailing module without SMTP server and if option MAILING_NO_USING_PHPMAIL is set to on.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAILING_LIMIT_WARNING_PHPMAIL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature allows Tactic to show a warning message (var contains the message to show, or translation key) on emailing send form if setup is on &amp;quot;phpmail&amp;quot;. Please note that, Tactic always try to translation the message considering the message is a translation key, before showing the translation or message if translation was not found.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAILING_LIMIT_WARNING_NOPHPMAIL:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can show a warning message (var contains the message to show, or translation key) on emailing send form if setup is something else than &amp;quot;phpmail&amp;quot;. Note: The application always try to translation the message considering the message is a translation key, before showing the translation or message if translation was not found.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EMAILING_USE_ADVANCED_SELECTOR:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activating this feature lets you enable the advanced selector for recipients.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAILING_LIMIT_SENDBYWEB:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can restrict number of emails you can send in same sending session with emailing module from GUI. The value &amp;quot;tactic_mailing_limit_sendbyweb&amp;quot; if defined into config file is used in priority for this limit. A negative value means, sending by web is forbidden.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAILING_LIMIT_SENDBYCLI: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can restrict number of emails you can send in same sending session with emailing module from CLI script. The value &amp;quot;tactic_mailing_limit_sendbycli&amp;quot; if defined into config file is used in priority for this limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIL_MASS_ACTION_ADD_LAST_IF_MAIN_DOC_NOT_FOUND&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allowing mailing mass action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Expense Report =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPENSEREPORT_ALLOW_OVERLAPPING_PERIODS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the activation of this feature you can enter several expense reports on same or overlapping date periods. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPENSEREPORT_OVERRIDE_VAT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you set this constant to 1, Tactic will allow expense reports to show VAT even if the global VAT setting is off. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPENSEREPORT_USE_OLD_NUMBERING_RULE:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows the module Expense Report use numbering rules that you can setup (like other modules do). If you need to keep the hard-coded numbering rule of expenses report used in v6.0 set this constant to 1. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_EXPENSE_IK:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to set index kilometers against a mileage index for different types of vehicles. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_EXPENSE_RULE:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to set a variety of rules per user/group/all so they can only create reports within their limits. &lt;br /&gt;
= Export Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPORT_CSV_SEPARATOR_TO_USE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows let the string value to use as default separator to delimit fields of exported files (by default Tactic uses &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;). Example: EXPORT_CSV_SEPARATOR_TO_USE=;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPORT_CSV_FORCE_CHARSET: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can choose the charset used in the output file built by the CSV exporter. By default it is ISO-8859-1. Example: EXPORT_CSV_FORCE_CHARSET= utf-8&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPORTTOOL_CATEGORIES:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can export categories (several lines) into one column with the &amp;quot;product export profile&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USE_STRICT_CSV_RULES: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use strict/real CSV format for export with the help of this feature. Do not clean/replace CR+LF with &amp;#039;\n&amp;#039; but quote them using the escaping CSV char (&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPORTS_SHARE_MODELS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can share export models between users.&lt;br /&gt;
= Foundation Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MEMBER_URL_REDIRECT_SUBSCRIPTION: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows a link called and shown when a member account is automatically created in member module by a guest user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MEMBER_EXT_URL_SUBSCRIPTION_INFO: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows the link of external page pointed by the &amp;quot;Show here&amp;quot; link added in front of payment cell, into the page to make online subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
= Interventions Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FICHINTER_CLASSIFY_BILLED: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature will allow to classify an intervention card as &amp;quot;Billed&amp;quot;. This add also trigger FICHINTER_CLASSIFY_BILLED into list of possible automatic event into agenda.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FICHINTER_DISABLE_DETAILS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable entry of details line on intervention. As well as can validate with no line.&lt;br /&gt;
= Invoice Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DEPOSIT_MULTI_TVA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can create one line per VAT rate from the origin document in deposits invoice. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_ALLOW_REUSE_OF_CREDIT_WHEN_PARTIALLY_REFUNDED: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can reuse an invoice after it is partially refunded. If a credit note was partially refunded (a refund was sent to the customer), with common situation, we wait to have the remaining amount refunded too. With this option, it is possible to convert the remaining amount of invoice into a discount to reuse it into another invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
SUUPLIER_INVOICE_ALLOW_REUSE_OF_CREDIT_WHEN_PARTIALLY_REFUNDED* ► See INVOICE_ALLOW_REUSE_OF_CREDIT_WHEN_PARTIALLY_REFUNDED, but for supplier credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_CAN_ALWAYS_BE_EDITED: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature will allow you to edit invoices even if payment was started. Please note that, the module &amp;quot;BlockedLog&amp;quot; is active as it is required in some nations for legal reasons, this will not change content of archived logs tracked by this module. By definition there is no way to change or remove archived records. It will just update data in your application and a new record to track your change into the read-only archive log.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_CAN_ALWAYS_BE_REMOVED: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As it is known that invoices cannot be deleted in Tactic. This feature can help you if this appears to be an issue to you. By enabling this feature you can always delete invoices (even if invoice is not last one). Please note that if the module &amp;quot;BlockedLog&amp;quot; is active (required by some countries for legal reason), this will not change content of archived logs tracked by this module. By definition there is no way to change or remove archived records. It will just update data in your application and a new record to track your change into the read-only archive log.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_CAN_NEVER_BE_REMOVED:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature will restrict the deletion of invoices when they are not in draft state.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_POSITIVE_CREDIT_NOTE:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature it can be ensured that all amounts on PDF credit notes are positive.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FACTURE_DEPOSITS_ARE_JUST_PAYMENTS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this you allow Tactic to treat deposit invoices as a special case and not as legal deposit invoice. This allows Deposit invoices not to get counted on turnover. Moreover, those are then applied as a payment, like a discount, on the final invoice. By default, the amount of final invoice is reduced when you include the deposit into draft of final invoice. Hence, the final amount is not reduced but it registers a payment. However, you need to remember that in a lot of European countries, using this option is not allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FACTURE_SENDBYEMAIL_FOR_ALL_STATUS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activating this feature allow you to send invoice by email to customer even if invoice has status &amp;quot;draft&amp;quot;.	&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_CREDIT_NOTE_STANDALONE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to start implementation to allow a credit note even without invoice (dangerous).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_USE_SITUATION: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable the &amp;quot;situation invoice&amp;quot; feature. Warning, this feature is bugged and may not be compatible with the final version of the feature once the bug will be solved. Also, using the double-entry accountancy module is not possible when this option is on (due to the same design problem).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_USE_SITUATION_CREDIT_NOTE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activating this feature will enable the &amp;quot;situation credit note&amp;quot; feature (need INVOICE_USE_SITUATION)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_USE_RETAINED_WARRANTY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can enable the retained warranty on invoice.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_DISABLE_DEPOSIT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable deposit invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_DISABLE_REPLACEMENT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable replacement invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_DISABLE_CREDIT_NOTE:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable credit notes. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_ADD_ZATCA_QR_CODE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add a QR code with format ZATCA (for Saudi Arabia) on PDF of invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To decode a QR image of a ZATCA code: https://www.onlinebarcodereader.com/. You can also use the mobile application https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.posbankbh.einvoiceqrreader&amp;amp;gl=FR&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_DOCUMENTS_WITHOUT_VAT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can generate PDF without a VAT. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_DOCUMENTS_WITHOUT_VAT_COLUMN: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can generate PDF without a VAT column. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WORKFLOW_BILL_ON_SHIPMENT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to change label of button with suitable label when you need to create invoice on shipments. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_ALLOW_EXTERNAL_DOWNLOAD:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to download the PDF from external interfaces. When a PDF is generated, a share key is automatically set so the file can be downloaded using the share key. Use the tag __DIRECTDOWNLOAD_URL_INVOICE__ in email template to insert it. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_POINTOFTAX_DATE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to add Point of Tax Date on invoices for country-specific legality reasons. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FACTURE_ENABLE_NEGATIVE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to validate an invoice even when amount is negative.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FACTURE_ENABLE_NEGATIVE_LINES: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to add negative lines to an invoice. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_USE_DEFAULT_DOCUMENT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows user to select a default invoice documents models according to invoice type. On invoice create page, the model is dynamically changed on invoice type selection. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FACTURE_REUSE_NOTES_ON_CREATE_FROM: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can reuse the Public Note and Private note of the previous object (Proposal) when creating the bill.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FACTUREFOURN_REUSE_NOTES_ON_CREATE_FROM: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can reuse the Public Note and Private note of the previous object when creating the supplier bill. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SHOW_FACNUMBER_IN_DISCOUNT_LIST: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can display the reference of credit notes in discount list when creating the bill.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_ALLOW_FREE_REF: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can gain the capability to change reference of an invoice. This will be possible as long as the invoice has the status “Draft” and only if your country is not in Europe. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_DISALLOW_REOPEN INVOICE_MAX_FUTURE_DELAY:&lt;br /&gt;
This feature includes numbers of seconds allowed for billing in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_AUTO_NEXT_MONTH_ON_LINES:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows the automatic lining of invoices for the upcoming month. Increase start date and end date by one month, if an invoice line is a clone of a time based service AND if this services started on the first day of month and ended on the last day of month. &lt;br /&gt;
= Leave =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_NON_WORKING_DAYS_INCLUDE_SATURDAY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to set Saturdays as working days you can set the value to 0 for this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_NON_WORKING_DAYS_INCLUDE_SUNDAY:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to set Sundays as working days you can set the value to 0 for this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
= Look or Theme =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_FAVICON_URL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a favicon URL. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_EASTER_EGG_COMMITSTRIP: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show a comic image from the CommitStrip website. Images are refreshed daily. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_STATUS_USES_CSS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change status design using new style. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_STATS_IN_OPENED_DASHBOARD: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this configuration you will be able to remove global stats box item if there are already in the new dashboard of opened elements and keep displayed stats on the opened item box (not only on mouse over) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_TOP_MENU_SEARCH_DROPDOWN: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the eldy theme, this configuration is already in use and move search input to top menu and use new design as well. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THEME_AGRESSIVENESS_RATIO:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can adjust the aggressiveness of colors, more specifically you can increase or decrease the colours. Value 0 is medium, value is between -100 (light grey colors) to +100 (very flashy colors). &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THEME_SHOW_BORDER_ON_INPUT MAIN_DISABLE_GLOBAL_WORKBOARD:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature lets you hide the workboard of the main page. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_GLOBAL_BOXSTATS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature lets you hide the Statistic Box of the main page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THEME_ELDY_USEBORDERONTABLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By adding this option, you can enable table border in Eldy theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THEME_TOPMENU_DISABLE_IMAGE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can disable the top menu image by adding this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= MultiCurrency =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_MULTICURRENCY_ALLOW_SYNCHRONIZATION: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can enable CurrencyLayer API synchronization. &lt;br /&gt;
= Order Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_PROPAL_REFCLIENT_FOR_ORDER:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can copy customer reference from proposal to order. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ORDER_REQUIRE_SOURCE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can make the input field &amp;quot;Source of order&amp;quot; mandatory.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ORDER_VALID_AFTER_CLOSE_PROPAL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can directly validate an order with proposal closure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ORDER_ALLOW_EXTERNAL_DOWNLOAD: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows external download. When a PDF is generated, a share key is automatically set so the file can be downloaded using the share key.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ORDER_ENABLE_NEGATIVE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can validate an order when amount is negative. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_PROPAGATE_EXTRAFIELDS_TO_ORDER: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can copy also extrafields from thirdparty to order (if name match).&lt;br /&gt;
= PDF Options =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ADD_PDF_BACKGROUND:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can add a PDF background. For using this you need to define this constant with short name of a PDF file (example &amp;quot;mypdf.pdf&amp;quot;) that must be saved into directory &amp;quot;documents/mycompany&amp;quot;. This will add PDF as a background of some of your generated PDF files (proposals, invoices, orders). If you need to concat PDF, see instead Module Concat PDF.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_FORCE_SAVEAS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature lets you disable force saving option provided by your browser. If your browser always asks to save downloaded files on disk (like PDF), you can try this option it will show your file directly in the options.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_PDF_AUTOUPDATE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable automatic generation of PDF each time a product line is added, deleted or modified, however, you can still generate document by clicking on &amp;quot;Generate&amp;quot;. This option may increase interface speed on servers with low CPU.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_PDF_COMPRESSION:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to disable PDF compression.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DOCUMENTS_WITH_PICTURE_WIDTH: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change the size of picture associated with PDF. However, you need to make sure that hidden option MAIN_GENERATE_PROPOSALS_WITH_PICTURE is activated. The default value is 20.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_DOCUMENTS_SHOW_FOOT_DETAILS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this option you can add the company address at the bottom of the page. This option is disabled by default. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_PROPOSALS_WITH_PICTURE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the activation of this feature you can include the first image of the product into the line of the generated PDF for customer proposals.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_INVOICES_WITH_PICTURE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the activation of this feature you can include the first image of the product into the line of the generated PDF for customer invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_SUPPLIER_PROPOSAL_WITH_PICTURE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the activation of this feature you can include the first image of the product into the line of the generated PDF for supplier proposals. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_DOCUMENTS_WITHOUT_VAT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable VAT on generated PDFs. This feature works with crabe template. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_DOCUMENTS_WITHOUT_VAT_COLUMN: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you activate this feature you will be able to hide column with VAT information however, the total would still be shown. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_INVERT_SENDER_RECIPIENT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this option you can invert sender and recipient in some PDF. Please note that, this option is set automatically if country if Germany.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ODT_AS_PDF:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activate ODT to PDF conversion. Value can be &amp;quot;libreoffice&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;unoconv&amp;quot;. Do not use value &amp;#039;jodconverter&amp;#039; any more, as it is declared deprecated and partly not functional, use value &amp;#039;libreoffice&amp;#039; instead, it requires only soffice (OpenOffice or LibreOffice) installed on server (use apt install soffice libreoffice-common libreoffice-writer).&lt;br /&gt;
If you got this error: javaldx failed! Warning: failed to read path from javaldx with no return to prompt when running soffice --headless -env:UserInstallation=file:&amp;quot;/tmp&amp;quot; --convert-to pdf --outdir xxx ./yyy.odt, check that directory defined into env:UserInstallation parameters exists and is writeable.&lt;br /&gt;
You may also have a look at this page if your server is on Windows: Générer automatiquement des documents PDF à partir de fichier ODT avec Doliwamp&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_ODT_AS_PDF_DEL_SOURCE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature helps in ODT generation. If set, then initial behaviour is conserved but ODT file is removed when option to convert it as PDF (see previous) is on. This feature is disabled by default. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_FORCE_FONT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to ignore the defined font into language file then you can do the same with the help of this feature. This feature allows you to force the usage of a particular font, such as &amp;quot;DejaVuSans&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_FORCE_FONT_SIZE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily change the default font size used by Tactic in PDFs with the application of this feature. For achieving the same you only need set the constant to your desired font size. Such as if you want to use 14 you will be needing to set the constant to 14.   &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_FREETEXT_HEIGHT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can change height of space reserved to output the free text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_TITLE_BACKGROUND_COLOR: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature will allow you to define a background colour onto title line. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_USE_LARGE_LOGO:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use the original logo in PDFs instead of small thumb them you can use this feature. However, note that this will make your PDFs very large in size. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_BACKGROUND_ON_PDF:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For using this feature you need to define the constant with a short name of the image. Please note that it is important to save the image file into the directory called &amp;quot;documents/mycompany/logos&amp;quot;. After completing the step you can add image to the generated PDFs.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_USE_COMPANY_NAME_OF_CONTACT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use the contact name and information rather than company then you can enable this feature for achieving the same. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_ADDALSOTARGETDETAILS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature lets you add the details of the recipients in the generated PDFs, you need to set the constant to 1 for achieving the same. This feature is very helpful when the generated documents are given to the delivery executives. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_TVAINTRA_IN_SOURCE_ADDRESS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show VAT N° in source address of PDF to comply with legalities in certain countries. Note that VAT number should be already visible in footer of page. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_PROPAL_USE_ELECTRONIC_SIGNING: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add optional esign field in pdf proposal. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PROFID1_IN_SOURCE_ADDRESS:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can show Professional ID 1 in source address of PDF to comply with legalities in certain countries. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PROFID2_IN_SOURCE_ADDRESS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can show Professional ID 2 in source address of PDF to comply with legalities in certain countries. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PROFID3_IN_SOURCE_ADDRESS:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can show Professional ID 3 in source address of PDF to comply with legalities in certain countries. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PROFID4_IN_SOURCE_ADDRESS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can Professional ID 4 in source address of PDF to comply with legalities in certain countries. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PROFID5_IN_SOURCE_ADDRESS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can Professional ID 5 in source address of PDF to comply with legalities in certain countries. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PROFID6_IN_SOURCE_ADDRESS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can Professional ID 6 in source address of PDF to comply with legalities in certain countries. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_BANK_HIDE_NUMBER_SHOW_ONLY_BICIBAN:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can hide bank number (&amp;quot;code banque/guichet/compte&amp;quot; for France, &amp;quot;sort code/account number&amp;quot; for GB) and keep only BIC/IBAN on PDF.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_BOLD_PRODUCT_REF_AND_PERIOD: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add more visibility (bold) on product ref and period of service in description with the help of this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_HIDE_PRODUCT_REF_IN_SUPPLIER_LINES:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can modify the use/position of Supplier Ref/Internal Ref with the item Label (name) on PDF documents with the help of this feature.  &lt;br /&gt;
Default (constant not set or Value 0): Internal ref followed by supplier ref in brackets.&amp;quot;COMPANY-REF-001 (Vendor SKU SUPPLIER-REF-001) - LABEL...&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value 1: Supplier ref only eg.&amp;quot;SUPPLIER-REF-001 - LABEL...&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value 2: Supplier ref followed by internal ref in brackets. eg.&amp;quot;SUPPLIER-REF-001 (InternalRef COMPANY-REF-001) - LABEL...&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_INCLUDE_ALIAS_IN_THIRDPARTY_NAME:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can include alternative/alias name into name on PDF.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_SECURITY_ENCRYPTION: &lt;br /&gt;
Encrypt PDF produced by Tactic ► (v?) . See additional parameters :PDF_SECURITY_ENCRYPTION_RIGHTS (block &amp;#039;modify&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;copy&amp;#039;) - PDF_SECURITY_ENCRYPTION_USERPASS - PDF_SECURITY_ENCRYPTION_OWNERPASS (random if not specified) - PDF_SECURITY_ENCRYPTION_STRENGTH (0 = RC4 40 bit; 1 = RC4 128 bit; 2 = AES 128 bit; 3 = AES 256 bit) - PDF_SECURITY_ENCRYPTION_PUBKEYS Array of recipients containing public-key certificates (&amp;#039;c&amp;#039;) and permissions (&amp;#039;p&amp;#039;) - For example: array(array(&amp;#039;c&amp;#039; =&amp;gt; &amp;#039;file://../examples/data/cert/tcpdf.crt&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;p&amp;#039; =&amp;gt; array(&amp;#039;print&amp;#039;)))&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_SHOW_PROJECT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can show project onto PDF (supported on supplier order only for the moment) by enabling this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_USE_1A:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can make PDF files produced by Tactic respect PDF/A standard. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_USE_ALSO_LANGUAGE_CODE: &lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use two languages in the PDF at the same time you can enable this feature. You need to define the constant with your desired language code, such as &amp;#039;en_US&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;sa_SA&amp;#039;. Upon doing so, you can have your PDFs being generated in both your defined language and default language.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DOC_SHOW_FIRST_SALES_REP: &lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can show the sales representative on header (at least on propal azur and rubis template)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_DASH_BETWEEN_LINES, SHOW_SUBPRODUCT_REF_IN_PDF, PDF_HIDE_PRODUCT_LABEL_IN_SUPPLIER_LINES: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can hide product label in supplier order lines with the help of this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
Point of Sale (POS)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHDESK_SHOW_KEYPAD: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature allows Tactic to show a mouse key pad into the &amp;#039;Simple Point of Sale&amp;#039; module.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POS_ADDON: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For using this feature you need to set this value to an existing numbering module rule (for example &amp;#039;mod_facture_terre&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;mod_facture_mars&amp;#039;) to force the numbering module to use for invoice ref definition when invoice is created by the POS. For example setting value POS_ADDON to &amp;#039;mod_facture_terre&amp;#039; will use the numbering module &amp;#039;terre&amp;#039; for invoice generated from POS, whatever is the numbering rule defined into invoice module setup (you can also use POS_NUMBERING_TERRE_FORCE_PREFIX and POS_NUMBERING_MARS_FORCE_PREFIX variable to change the prefix used).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAKEPOS_ENABLE_SUMUP: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enable the compatibility of TakePOS with the card reader terminal SumUp. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAKEPOS_CAN_FORCE_BANK_ACCOUNT_DURING_PAYMENT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enable the possibility to force the bank account during the payment in TakePOS. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAKEPOS_NUMPAD_FORCE_PAYMENT_ICONS_LABELS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PDF_HIDE_PRODUCT_LABEL_IN_SUPPLIER_LINES &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can hide product label in supplier lines while generating a PDF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Products Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CATEGORY_GRAPHSTATS_ON_PRODUCTS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can show graph of products with categories and totals in Products Area screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PRODUCT_DISABLE_CUSTOMCOUNTRYCODE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can avoid customs code and country of origin to be set as product description when added to Proposal/Order/Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_ADD_TYPE_IN_DOCUMENTS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add text &amp;quot;Product&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Service&amp;quot; at beginning of details lines on built PDF documents.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DONOTSEARCH_ANYWHERE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Ajax search is enabled, search is done on criteria anywhere in label of product. By adding this option, search is done only on start of label. This is really faster when you have a huge number of products.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DIRECT_STATUS_UPDATE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to change the status of the product (for sale/not for sale for purchase/not for purchase) directly on the product page via an on/off switch button. This can be convenient for those who need to quickly disable certain statuses of products without having to go through a complicated process of editing and modifying. Also can be very useful if used as a filter on the product and product search list. This option doesn&amp;#039;t generate a MODIFY trigger, so be careful with external modules. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SEARCH_PRODUCT_BY_FOURN_REF:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to search a product by supplier ref in document&amp;#039;s add line form. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_DISABLE_FREE_LINES:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disallow using free lines to add line in documents. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SHOW_PRODUCT_ACTIVITY_TRIM:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature Tactic can show Product and Services turnover before for all four quarters tax over recent years recent years on the product area. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUIT_DESC_IN_LIST: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature Tactic can show long description of product/service into lists.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_PROPAGATE_CUSTOMER_PRICES_ON_CHILD_COMPANIES: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable propagation of prices per customer from a customer to its child company.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_PUBLIC_URL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable public URL in product card. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_STOCK_LEVELS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable properties of stock limits and desired optimal value on product. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_NATURE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable nature in product card. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_WEIGHT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable weight in product card. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_PRICES: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable prices in product card. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_ACCOUNTING:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable accounting in product card. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_SIZE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable size in product card.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_LENGTH: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable length in product card &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_SURFACE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable surface in product card. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_VOLUME: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable volume in product card.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_CUSTOM_INFO: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can disable custom info (custom code and country origin) in product/service card.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUIT_MULTIPRICES_USE_VAT_PER_LEVEL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to set a dedicated VAT for each price level when option to use price per level/segment is on.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUIT_CUSTOMER_PRICES_BY_QTY:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If price per quantity ► Experimental&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUIT_CUSTOMER_PRICES_BY_QTY_MULTIPRICES:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If price per quantity and customer ► Experimental&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_LOT_ENABLE_QUALITY_CONTROL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to control quality on Lot. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_MAX_LENGTH_COMBO:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to limit the length of the label displayed when adding lines in proposals/invoices/orders. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_MAX_VISIBLE_PHOTO: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows Tactic to show a maximum number of product photos (as thumbnails) on the product main card. For example, if you set this constant to &amp;#039;3&amp;#039; will show the first three product photos found on the product card.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_PDF_MERGE_PROPAL: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to enable module Proposal merge product PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_USE_OLD_PATH_FOR_PHOTO:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ask Tactic to check also old path (before 3.7) where photos were stored.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_USE_UNITS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to add another units on products (Use same dictionary as default unit feature) and propagate this unit on line of documents.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESOURCE_ON_PRODUCTS_RESOURCE_ON_SERVICES:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to affect resources on products/services. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_SHOW_ORIGIN_IN_COMBO:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows Tactic to show origin of products when adding lines in proposals/invoices/orders. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_ATTRIBUTES_HIDECHILD: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to add option hide child if variants. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_ADD_FORM_ADD_TO: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can add a product to a draft proposal/order/invoice, from the product card.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_SELLBY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can hide the Sell by date. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DISABLE_EATBY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can hide the Eat by date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_DENY_CHANGE_PRODUCT_TYPE:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can forbid to change the product type. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_SORT_BY_CATEGORY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can sort the product by categories instead of by ID&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_ADD_NET_MEASURE:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can support Net Measure in product&amp;#039;s card.php (For real weight, volume or piece; needed for some business ie fruits, vegetables....). Note brut value is already available natively, use this option only if you need 2 weights, 2 volumes for each product).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_GENERATE_REF_AFTER_FORM&lt;br /&gt;
By adding this, you can generate product reference after generating a form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Projects Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_ALLOW_TO_LINK_FROM_OTHER_COMPANY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can link an object to a project of another third party. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_ALLOW_COMMENT_ON_PROJECT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add comment feature on a project. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_ALLOW_COMMENT_ON_TASK:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add comment feature on project task. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_CAN_ALWAYS_LINK_TO_ALL_SUPPLIERS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can link a project to any supplier even when using the third party link feature. Please note that you need to set the constant to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_CREATE_ON_OVERVIEW_DISABLED:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can hide the &amp;quot;create ...&amp;quot; button on the overview page. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_DISABLE_UNLINK_FROM_OVERVIEW:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can remove the button from a link in the project overview. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_HIDE_UNSELECTABLES:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can hide into select list, all project that we can&amp;#039;t select (closed or draft)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_HIDE_TASKS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can hide tasks. This feature can be used when the users are using project only as an analytics key and not using tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_LIST_SHOW_STARTDATE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature Tactic can show start date of projects in project lists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_LINK_ON_OVERWIEW_DISABLED: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature Tactic can hide the &amp;quot;link to&amp;quot; form on the overview page. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_SHOW_REF_INTO_LISTS:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add column with project ref into list (with 3.7 list of supplier invoices only, will be expanded to other lists)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_TIME_ON_ALL_TASKS_MY_PROJECTS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add time spent on tasks, even if you are not assigned to task (however, task must be a project you are a contact).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_OPEN_ALWAYS_ON_TAB: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can set to value &amp;#039;task&amp;#039;, or &amp;#039;preview&amp;#039; to always open the project on the given tab instead of main tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_ELEMENTS_FOR_MINUS_MARGIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECT_HIDE_OPEN_PROJECTS_LIST_ON_PROJECT_AREA:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a long list of open projects and you need to hide those from your project area, then you can now achieve that by adding a constant to other setup. For adding the constant, you need to go to Home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; other setup -&amp;gt; put ‘PROJECT_HIDE_OPEN_PROJECTS_LIST_ON_PROJECT_AREA’ at the place of name -&amp;gt; set value to 1 -&amp;gt; click on add. The list of open projects will be hidden in the project area once you are done adding the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Proposals Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_GENERATE_PROPOSALS_WITH_PICTURE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can add a picture of the product (the first one found if there are several) into the generated PDF of proposals. Please note that using this will reduce the available width for the product description.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PROPAL_CHOOSE_ODT_DOCUMENT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you&amp;#039;ll be able to select which ODT document to use when close or cancel proposals, on setup page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_PDF_PROPAL_USE_ELECTRONIC_SIGNING: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can add optional esign field in pdf proposal. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPAL_CLONE_ON_CREATE_PAGE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you will be able to get a clone button on the proposal creation page. You can directly click on the “clone” button to create a new proposal from the existing ones. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPAL_DISABLE_SIGNATURE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can prevent showing the box for signature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODUCT_PDF_MERGE_PROPAL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When generating the proposal PDF, all PDFs linked to products linked to proposal are also included into final PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPOSAL_ALLOW_EXTERNAL_DOWNLOAD:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate a share key with the help of this option so the file can be downloaded using the share key. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPOSAL_AUTO_ADD_AUTHOR_AS_CONTACT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Proposal Author as user contact follow proposal with the help of this feature.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPOSAL_PDF_HIDE_PAYMENTTERM:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can hide the payment term on proposal with the help of this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPOSAL_PDF_HIDE_PAYMENTMODE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can hide the payment mode on proposal with the help of this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WORKFLOW_PROPAL_CAN_CLASSIFY_BILLED_WITHOUT_INVOICES:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can make Button &amp;quot;Classified Billed&amp;quot; visible on proposal even if there is no invoice linked to proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPAL_REOPEN_UNSIGNED_ONLY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not want to reopen the signed or billed proposals you can put this feature in use. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPOSAL_ARE_NOT_BILLABLE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not need the billing button on the proposal you can disable billing button on proposals by activating this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROPAL_SKIP_ACCEPT_REFUSE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can skip accept and refused steps by incorporating this option in the setup. Once you turn this on, you will find a conjoined option called &amp;quot;Set accept/refused&amp;quot; in the course of quotation or proposal life cycle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Services Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SERVICE_ARE_ECOMMERCE_200238EC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can turn this on when the seller and buyer are in Europe and buyer is not a company, so that the feature can use the VAT of buying country. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_FILL_SERVICE_DATES_FROM_LAST_SERVICE_LINE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add line form add a button to fill service dates from the last service line by enabling this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
= Shipments =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STOCK_WAREHOUSE_NOT_REQUIRED_FOR_SHIPMENTS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only need the shipment feature and there is no need of the stock source, you can activate this feature. With the help of this you can add a shipment line, with no stock source defined. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPMENT_GETS_ALL_ORDER_PRODUCTS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature allows Tactic to add all order lines in shipment, including the one with 0 in quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
= Stocks =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_ORDER_DISABLE_STOCK_DISPATCH_WHEN_TOTAL_REACHED:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can disable stock dispatch when total expected was already received with the help of this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STOCK_EXCLUDE_VIRTUAL_PRODUCTS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can exclude stock for virtual products by activating this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTREPOT_EXTRA_STATUS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can add an extra status to your warehouse. Instead of the 2 status (Closed, Open), you can provide a Warehouse with 3 status: Closed, Open (for all movements), Open (for internal movement only). Internal movement only means you will not be able to use the warehouse to make shipment or receptions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_ORDER_STATUS_FOR_VIRTUAL_STOCK:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, in Tactic, the calculation of virtual stock is done with the status order and status partially received, which respectively are status 3 and 4. By activating this feature you can add different statuses in Tactic, to be used in the case of virtual stock. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STOCK_MOVEMENT_LIST_HIDE_UNIT_PRICE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To hide unit price on some pages you can activate this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STOCK_MOVEMENT_LIST_HIDE_UNIT_PRICE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By adding this you can hide unit price in stock movement list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Suppliers Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FOURN_PRODUCT_AVAILABILITY:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can activate the product availability in the suppliers’ product price page. You can activate the feature for achieving the same. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RELOAD_PAGE_ON_SUPPLIER_CHANGE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reload form with supplier-specific details when supplier is selected from drop-down list while creating a supplier order/invoice with the help of this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_INVOICE_WITH_PREDEFINED_PRICES_ONLY:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can restrict selection of products in supplier invoice to only those with a buying price defined for that supplier. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_ORDER_AUTOADD_USER_CONTACT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the activation of this feature you can add user approving supplier order as a contact automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_ORDER_DEFAULT_PAYMENT_MODE_ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default payment method for suppliers (rowid in table llx_c_paiement) by activating this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_ORDER_USE_DISPATCH_STATUS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can add a status on each dispatch order line when receiving products from suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_ORDER_NO_DIRECT_APPROVE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want a two-stepped process while approving an order, you can enable this feature. This will add two buttons, &amp;quot;Validate&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Approve&amp;quot; in 2 steps.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_ORDER_WITH_PREDEFINED_PRICES_ONLY: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Restrict selection of products in supplier order to only those with a buying price defined for that supplier. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_ORDER_EDIT_BUYINGPRICE_DURING_RECEIPT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can modify the buying price used for PMP calculation when making a stock reception on a supplier order by activating this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_PROPOSAL_WITH_PREDEFINED_PRICES_ONLY:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to restrict selection of products in supplier proposal to only those with a buying price defined for that supplier. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DISPLAY_DISCOUNTED_SUPPLIER_PRICE:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to display discounted supplier price when searching product in supplier documents. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_CAN_EDIT_SUPPLIER_ON_SUPPLIER_ORDER:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to change the supplier on a draft supplier order. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPPLIER_PROPOSAL_ALLOW_EXTERNAL_DOWNLOAD &lt;br /&gt;
= Third Parties Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMPANY_AQUARIUM_CLEAN_REGEX: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a REGEX rule on the third parties names. It applies a regex replacement pattern on generated code if COMPANY_AQUARIUM_CLEAN_REGEX is set. Value must be a regex with parenthesis. The part into parenthesis is kept, the rest removed. For example if COMPANY_AQUARIUM_CLEAN_REGEX = &amp;#039;^..(..)..(.*)&amp;#039; the first char and second char are removed and the char 5 and 6 too&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_EMAIL_MANDATORY:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature makes e-mail a mandatory field when creating a third-party. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_DISABLE_CUSTOMERS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can remove all menu and features related to customers.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_DISABLE_PROSPECTS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can remove all menu and features related to prospects. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_DISABLE_STATE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not want to use field &amp;quot;state/province&amp;quot;, you can activate this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_SORT_ON_TYPEENT:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By enabling this feature you can sort out the combo list of &amp;quot;type of third party&amp;quot; on alphabetical order instead of the field &amp;quot;position&amp;quot; that appears into dictionary instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_ASK_FOR_SHIPPING_METHOD:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping method can be predefined on customer card and will be used as default on order creation. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_ADD_REF_IN_LIST: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature Tactic can display the code before the name in the lists. Such as, value 1 -&amp;gt; Code + name + alias ou Code + name if colone alias 2 -&amp;gt; Code + alias 3 -&amp;gt; Alias&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_CAN_HAVE_CATEGORY_EVEN_IF_NOT_CUSTOMER_PROSPECT_SUPPLIER: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to add Categories to third parties that are not customer, prospect or supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_DEFAULT_USELOCALTAX1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new third party, if you want the field &amp;quot;Use second tax&amp;quot; to set to on or off depending on value of this parameter, you can activate this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_DEFAULT_USELOCALTAX2: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new third party, if you want the field &amp;quot;Use third tax&amp;quot; to set to on or off depending on value of this parameter, you can activate this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_NOTCUSTOMERPROSPECT_BY_DEFAULT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not want to set status &amp;quot;Customer/Prospect&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; when creating a new third party from menu &amp;quot;New third party&amp;quot;, you can enable this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_INCLUDE_PARENT_IN_LINKTO:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to search also for elements on parent third party when using the &amp;quot;link to&amp;quot; object feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_INCLUDE_PROJECT_THIRDPARY_IN_LINKTO: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to search also for elements on third party that own the project of the current element when using the &amp;quot;link to&amp;quot; object feature (if project is owned by a different thirdparty than current one).&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_LOGO_ALLOW_EXTERNAL_DOWNLOAD:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows the external download of a logo. So, when a logo is uploaded, a share key is automatically set so the file can be downloaded using the share key.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_SUGGEST_ALSO_ADDRESS_CREATION:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can enabled contact creation on third-party create card. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_QUICKSEARCH_ON_FIELDS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature personalized search criteria can be added to Tactic. For example: $conf-&amp;gt;global-&amp;gt;THIRDPARTY_QUICKSEARCH_ON_FIELDS = &amp;#039;s.nom=ThirdPartyName;s.name_alias=AliasNameShort;s.code_client=CustomerCode&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MEMBER_CAN_CONVERT_CUSTOMERS_TO_MEMBERS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows Tactic to enabled member creation on third-party create card. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_DISABLE_PARENTCOMPANY:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows Tactic to disable attachment to a parent company.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_CUSTOMERPROSPECT_BY_DEFAULT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the third party to customer by default by activating this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_SUPPLIER_BY_DEFAULT:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the third party to supplier by default by activating this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;THIRDPARTY_CUSTOMERTYPE_BY_DEFAULT: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the third party type by default (3 = customer &amp;amp; prospect / 2 = prospect / 1 = customer) by activating this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONTACT_DISABLE_PERSONALINFO: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to disable Personal data on contact page. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_DISABLE_WORKFORCE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to disable work force selector on society page&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_SHOW_VAT_IN_LIST:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to display VAT number in combo list of third-parties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCIETE_SHOW_VAT_IN_LIST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By adding this you can display VAT number in the combo list of thirdparties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ticket Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TICKET_SHOW_MESSAGES_ON_CARD:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows Tactic to display all ticket related messages on the main ticket card.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TICKET_AUTO_ASSIGN_CONTRACT_CREATE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this feature is enabled Tactic can automatically create a contract linked to the ticket. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TICKET_AUTO_CREATE_FICHINTER_CREATE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this feature is enabled Tactic can automatically create an intervention linked to the ticket. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WORKFLOW_TICKET_CLOSE_INTERVENTION:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this feature is enabled Tactic can automatically close an intervention linked to the ticket upon the closure of the ticket. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TICKET_CHECK_NOTIFY_THIRDPARTY_AT_CREATION:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic allows the users to send notification to the third-parties after creating tickets for them. For enabling this setup, the users need to follow these steps, Home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; other setup -&amp;gt; add TICKET_CHECK_NOTIFY_THIRDPARTY_AT_CREATION in the place of name-&amp;gt; add 1 as value -&amp;gt; click on add. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TICKETS_MESSAGE_FORCE_MAIL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to precheck email sending on ticket message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= VAT Report =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_INCLUDE_ZERO_VAT_IN_REPORTS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this feature enables the inclusion of lines with VAT to 0% (for &amp;quot;auto-liquidation&amp;quot; in EEC)&lt;br /&gt;
= Website Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WEBSITE_USE_WEBSITE_ACCOUNTS: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a table and a tab to manage some accounts for websites to a third party by activating this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WEBSITE_ADD_CSS_TO_BODY:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAKEPOS_ALTERNATIVE_PAYMENT_SCREEN:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your business is heavily depended on the use of TakePOS on a daily basis then you might as well need an alternative payment screen for accelerating the process of payment. Tactic allows you to add an alternative payment screen in TakePOS by adding a constant to your other setup. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For adding the constant, you need to go to home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; other setup -&amp;gt; parameters -&amp;gt; put down ‘TAKEPOS_ALTERNATIVE_PAYMENT_SCREEN’ under the criteria name -&amp;gt; put 1 under value -&amp;gt; click on ‘add’. Once your constant is added properly, you can see an alternative payment screen in your TakePOS settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAKEPOS_HIDE_PRODUCT_PRICES:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are in need of hiding the product prices within the TakePOS module, then you can do so by only adding a constant to the setup options. The steps for achieving the same you need to follow the below-mentioned steps: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; other setup -&amp;gt; put ‘TAKEPOS_HIDE_PRODUCT_PRICES’ at the place of name -&amp;gt; set value to 1 -&amp;gt; click on add. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once your constant is added properly, the product prices in TakePOS will be hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WYSIWYG Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCKEDITOR_ENABLE_DETAILS_FULL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this feature you can cut and paste external images (hosted on external server) into description of proposal, orders or invoices. Please note that, PDF generation is not guaranteed with this. Also if the image is removed or renamed by the image hosting service, your proposal, order or invoice will be broken.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCKEDITOR_ALLOW_ANY_CONTENT:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you activate this feature Tactic will be able to allow to enter any content. However, this will totally disable content filtering which is one of the most important CKEditor features. You can use this to keep all your tags and attributes in the html content.&lt;br /&gt;
= STRIPE Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STRIPE_FORCE_VERSION: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to force the STRIPE version. &lt;br /&gt;
= ClickToDial Module =&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CLICKTODIAL_FORCENEWTARGET: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This features opens ClickToDial in new page.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=3637</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Sidebar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=3637"/>
		<updated>2024-11-30T10:41:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* navigation&lt;br /&gt;
** mainpage|mainpage-description&lt;br /&gt;
** Features|Tactic Features&lt;br /&gt;
** recentchanges-url|recentchanges&lt;br /&gt;
** randompage-url|randompage&lt;br /&gt;
** User-Documentaion|User Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-modules|Tactic Modules&lt;br /&gt;
** Other_setup|Other Setup&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-report-generation|Report Generation&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-How-To|Tactic How To&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-FAQ|Tactic FAQ&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-Tutorials|Tactic Tutorials&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-License|Tactic License&lt;br /&gt;
** ChangeLog|Tactic Change Log &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SEARCH&lt;br /&gt;
* TOOLBOX&lt;br /&gt;
* LANGUAGES&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Tactic-How-To&amp;diff=3636</id>
		<title>Tactic-How-To</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Tactic-How-To&amp;diff=3636"/>
		<updated>2024-11-30T10:06:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* How to questions for Miscellaneous Activities */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Events/Agenda Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to export Tactic Agenda and include it into a third party application, such as Google? &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exporting the Tactic agendas the users need to go through the basic steps of agenda module. At first the users need to activate the agenda module and then follow the following steps: &lt;br /&gt;
*	The users need to create events and agendas &lt;br /&gt;
*	The users can go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;other&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab from the module setup page&lt;br /&gt;
*	Then the users need to input a word of their choice into the field of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;key to allow export&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*	Then the users need to enter any word of their choice and proceed towards completion by clicking on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*	The users can get the link on the line and can proceed with completing the procedure by advancing their focus towards &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“An export link to ical format is available at following link” &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
An example of the build link is provided in the following lines: &lt;br /&gt;
 http://mysite/comm/action/agendaexport.php?format=ical&amp;amp;type=event&amp;amp;exportkey=choosen_word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Then the users need to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;agenda parameters&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; of the third party application that the users will be using for exporting the agenda. The users need to add the URL properly for exporting the Tactic agenda. &lt;br /&gt;
However, the users can face problem after pasting the link. Google can show notifications such as, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;The URL cannot be generated, as the robot.txt file does not allow exploration&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. In this case the users need to edit the robot.txt files, which is already persistent in the Tactic root website. The users can change it into something that can be explored by the third party application. &lt;br /&gt;
 User-agent: *&lt;br /&gt;
 Disallow: /&lt;br /&gt;
 User-agent: Googlebot&lt;br /&gt;
 Disallow: /&lt;br /&gt;
 Allow :&lt;br /&gt;
 /comm/action/agendaexport.php?format=ical&amp;amp;type=event&amp;amp;exportkey=chosen_word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the users need to wait for 24 hours as it takes quite a lot of time by the users to be known by Google.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  Accounting simplified Module==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to set up the accounting module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For setting up the accounting modules the users need to follow the mentioned steps: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; Financial Modules (Accounting/Treasury)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -&amp;gt; The users need to choose their preferred module ([[Accounting_simplified_Module|Simplified accounting]] or [[Accounting_double_entry_Module|accounting double entry]], the users need to remember that only one of these modules can be activated at a time). Before using the accounting modules the users need to create bank accounts in Tactic and create invoices, expense reports so that the data is visible under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounting&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu. If the users activate simplified accounting then they will only be able to perform a limited number of activities with the help of that module, such as validating invoices and recording reports. However, if the users activate double entry accounting then they will be able to add journals, ledger and many more other advanced accounting feature, which will certainly be prove to a positive experience of using Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add or change a chart of account?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It has been sated before that Tactic comes with a number of charts of accounts already and the user can change these charts of account at any time they want. Changing the charts of accounts is not at all a complicated process, as it may seem to be. For changing the charts of account the users need to follow some steps, which are: Accounting (From the menu bar) -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Chart of accounts -&amp;gt; The users will be able to see the option of Select active chart of accounts -&amp;gt; Select the preferred chart of accounts from the drop down menu -&amp;gt; Change and load. After completing these steps the users will be able to use new chart of account easily. However, without activation of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Accounting_double_entry_Module|Accounting double entry]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module it is impossible to use the charts of account. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to create custom chart of accounts in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There are already a number of chart of accounts added in Tactic. However, the users may need their custom chart of accounts for enhancing their business related ventures. It is needed to be stated that tactic does not support creation of custom chart of account through its default settings. Hence, for accomplishing this feature the users need to adopt two alternate methods. The first method is to follow GUI and the second method is to ask support from the Tactic support team. The users can contact the Tactic support team by dropping a mail on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; by their registered mail ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Bank and cash module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can a bank statement be imported in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Bank statements can certainly be imported in Tactic by manual procedure. The importation of bank statements are performed by following some steps. For accomplishing this the users need to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Bank_and_cash_module|Bank module]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and then click on the options of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank entries&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users at first need to choose the Bank and Cash menu from the menu bar, then they need to follow the following steps: Bank and Cash menu -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; one of the banks from the list needs to be chosen -&amp;gt; Bank entries -&amp;gt; Add entry. At the add entry filed the users can add their preferred bank statement and can enjoy the rest of the functionalities of Tactic Bank and Cash module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Barcode Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can I add a QR code in my invoices?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a QR code to the invoices is not something very complicated. It can be achieved with some small steps. For accomplishing the same you just need to go to Home-&amp;gt; Setup-&amp;gt; other setup. There you can find the blank area, in which you can add your own setup options. In the criterion of name you need to add &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVOICE_ADD_ZATCA_QR_CODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and set the value to 1. Then click the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete. After completing Tactic will be generating PDFs with QR codes, when you use the “crabe” or “sponge” templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Tags and Categories Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add tags and categories?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tags and categories play an important role in specifying the type of a product or a vendor or a customer or a member and many more. The users of Tactic have been provided with the opportunity of creating tags and categories for various elements such as products, third parties, members and more. The creation of the tags and categories can be performed with the help of Tactic GUI. It can also be accomplished with the help of few steps, these steps are: Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Tags_and_Categories_Module|Tags and categories module]] -&amp;gt; the users need to activate the module for creating tags and categories. Then the users need to visit any module that contains the feature of tags and categories much as the member module. They need to follow the next steps then, Member menu (From the main menu bar) -&amp;gt; Tags and categories (from the vertical menu) -&amp;gt; New tag/category -&amp;gt; Fill up the needed criteria -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the tags the users will be able to use the tags and categories feature seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==  How to questions for Customer Invoice Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a daily, weekly and monthly sales report system in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As for now sales reports cannot be found in Tactic, however, the users can generate a monthly payment report for customers and vendors from the Billing module. The users will be able to generate the payment report for any month just by adding their preferred months. For achieving this the users need to first activate the [[Customer_Invoice_Module|invoice module]], by following these steps, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Invoice -&amp;gt; activate -&amp;gt; Billing module -&amp;gt; Vendor invoices/Customer invoices -&amp;gt;  Reporting -&amp;gt; the users then need to choose the months -&amp;gt; Create&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The monthly report will be generated as a PDF format. Tactic generates the reports in a PDF format to eliminate the efforts of the users. The reports can directly be added to the organization’s documents without having to perform any modification and alteration.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can I add a QR code in my invoices?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a QR code to the invoices is not something very complicated. It can be achieved with some small steps. For accomplishing the same you just need to go to Home-&amp;gt; Setup-&amp;gt; other setup. There you can find the blank area, in which you can add your own setup options. In the criterion of name you need to add INVOICE_ADD_ZATCA_QR_CODE and set the value to 1. Then click the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete. After completing Tactic will be generating PDFs with QR codes, when you use the “crabe” or “sponge” templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic support different invoice types based on different country standard?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As it has been stated before that Tactic is designed for eliminating the manual efforts of the customers with the help of digitization. This is what made the Tactic developers develop Tactic as an all in one ERP &amp;amp; CRM solution. Therefore, Tactic certainly supports different types of invoices for providing the users with an excellent and updated services.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can invoice be generated in a PDF format?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic effectively reduces the amount of manual effort that a business organisation or an individual applies in the work process. Hence, it is quite acceptable for Tactic to provide the users with an opportunity of generating the invoices in the PDF format. For accomplishing this the users only need to go to the [[Customer_Invoice_Module|invoice module]] from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu the process of generating PDF is: Billing/ Payment menu -&amp;gt; Customer invoice/Vendor invoice -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Click on the desired invoice -&amp;gt; Linked file -&amp;gt; Generate. After clicking on generate the users will be able to see the generated PDF file in the following area. Upon clicking on the PDF name a pop up will show whether to show or download the file. The users can download the file by choosing the download option easily. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there an option of adding signature in invoices? &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures are an integrated part of invoices, hence, it was important to provide the mandatory feature of adding signature to the users. The users will certainly be able to add signatures, seals and other related elements in the invoices and proposals. For completing this the users need to go through a few steps. The users need to go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Customer_Invoice_Module|invoice module]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Free Text on invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be visible under the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;other options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users can enter their signature on the area and it will be used in every invoice that is issues through Tactic. The users can add watermarks as well by adding their watermark in the following criterion called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;watermarks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can the border style in invoice be changed?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic has already provided the users with a number of PDF templates already within its set-up. However, the users may not find those as their preferred PDF templates, and they can easily modify their own PDF template and use that in their invoices. Same can be done with the border style in invoices as well. The users can also achieve the same with the help of GUI as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can we change the invoice number going beyond the default numbering system?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We are afraid that the users cannot change the invoice number going beyond the numbering system all by themselves. As Tactic automatically creates invoices’ number based on the previously completed invoices, it is not possible to change the number of invoices through the software. However, we understand that the users might face situation where they need to change the invoice number for their use. In this case the users can easily contact the Tactic team and ask for assistance. The users can drop a mail at support@alsoft.org from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact the users within 48 hours. However, you can change the invoice number format, if that helps you. For achieving the same you can go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; [[Customer_Invoice_Module|invoice module]] -&amp;gt; Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add Tax invoice in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Taxes are one of the most important factors associated with business. Hence, it is necessary to manage all the business related taxes error free. Keeping a record of tax invoices is one of the most effective method of managing all the taxes. This can be performed easily with Tactic.  Adding Tax invoices in tactic can be performed with the combination of a few small steps. The very first step of adding tax invoices in Tactic is associated with visiting Home -&amp;gt; [[#Setting_up_company/_organisation|Company/Organisation]] -&amp;gt; enable taxes as per choice. Tactic allows the users to add up to three different Taxes. After enabling the Taxes the users will be able to enjoy the Tax invoice in the Billing module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a method of adding automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders? If there is a way then how can I accomplish this easily?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As Tactic has been designed for increasing the convenience of the users it is certainly possible for the users to add automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders. For adding automatic terms and conditions the user only have to add those terms and conditions to the public note area and it will be visible in the PDF version of the invoice, contract or proposals. For adding terms and conditions the users need to follow these steps: Commerce menu (for contracts and proposals)/ Billing menu (for invoices) -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; select the preferred one -&amp;gt; Notes (from the ribbon) -&amp;gt; Add terms and conditions in public note -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the users need to generate PDF version of that invoice/contract/proposal. The Terms and conditions will be visible. The users can add terms and conditions in the public note area while creating an invoice/contract/proposal as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can numbers to words be added to the invoice within Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There is no direct method available for changing numbers to words. Hence, for enjoying this feature the users need to contact the Tactic Team and place their request for a customised service. For contacting the Tactic team the user need to drop a mail at &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for this paid service. It is important for the users to drop the mail only from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact them within 48 hours and let the users know if their paid request can be processed or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Are there different types of invoices available in the Tactic invoice module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Different types of invoices are available Tactic based on the activities. There are different invoices such as VAT invoice, TAX invoice, Customer invoice, Vendor invoice and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Accounting double entry Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to set up the accounting module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For setting up the accounting modules the users need to follow the mentioned steps: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; Financial Modules (Accounting/Treasury)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -&amp;gt; The users need to choose their preferred module ([[Accounting_simplified_Module|Simplified accounting]] or [[Accounting_double_entry_Module|accounting double entry]], the users need to remember that only one of these modules can be activated at a time). Before using the accounting modules the users need to create bank accounts in Tactic and create invoices, expense reports so that the data is visible under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounting&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu. If the users activate simplified accounting then they will only be able to perform a limited number of activities with the help of that module, such as validating invoices and recording reports. However, if the users activate double entry accounting then they will be able to add journals, ledger and many more other advanced accounting feature, which will certainly be prove to a positive experience of using Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add or change a chart of account?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It has been sated before that Tactic comes with a number of charts of accounts already and the user can change these charts of account at any time they want. Changing the charts of accounts is not at all a complicated process, as it may seem to be. For changing the charts of account the users need to follow some steps, which are: Accounting (From the menu bar) -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Chart of accounts -&amp;gt; The users will be able to see the option of Select active chart of accounts -&amp;gt; Select the preferred chart of accounts from the drop down menu -&amp;gt; Change and load. After completing these steps the users will be able to use new chart of account easily. However, without activation of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Accounting_double_entry_Module|Accounting double entry]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module it is impossible to use the charts of account. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to create custom chart of accounts in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There are already a number of chart of accounts added in Tactic. However, the users may need their custom chart of accounts for enhancing their business related ventures. It is needed to be stated that tactic does not support creation of custom chart of account through its default settings. Hence, for accomplishing this feature the users need to adopt two alternate methods. The first method is to follow GUI and the second method is to ask support from the Tactic support team. The users can contact the Tactic support team by dropping a mail on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; by their registered mail ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Email Collector Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can I use a Gmail account for my Tactic Email collector?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Email collectors are designed for helping the user to collect important emails and make tickets out of those automatically. The users can certainly add any account that they want as the default receiver for the Email collector module. For accomplishing this the user just need to go to the email collector module and then add their preferred Gmail account as the [[Email_Collector_Module|Email collector]]. This can be performed by following a few steps, which are, Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; Interfaces with external systems -&amp;gt; Email Collector -&amp;gt; Click on the reference name of the Email collector -&amp;gt; From the area of filters add an receiver (s) -&amp;gt; add the Gmail account at the area beside it -&amp;gt; Add. After completing this the users will be able to collect emails through the Gmail account.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to put email collector into work?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Email_Collector_Module|Email collector]] helps in enhancing the CRM (Customer Relationship Management) program in a much better manner. The primary work that an Email collector does is to collect emails and make tickets out of those. It may be a bit complicated to understand, hence, an example can help in understanding the working procedure of an email collector. Just as the users send various emails at &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; by their registered email ID regarding various matters and confusions that they come across while using Tactic. Our, Tactic Team’s responsibility is to read those mails and get back to the users with proper solutions. However, it is no always possible to read a vast amount emails and reply all day. This is where Email collector makes our work easier. Email collector collects and make tickets out of those emails, so that the Tactic team can easily map out the method with which they can provide the users with assistance.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is exactly how the users can put the email collectors into work. Tactic email collector will be collecting all the emails from the users’ clients, customers, vendors and more. Moreover, the Tactic email collector is also capable of collecting responses, collecting leads and making projects out of those and collecting candidatures. Additionally, the users can add their own preferred email collectors for better use of Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Mass Emailing Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;What to do if I am unable to send emails through Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For using the emailing facilities of Tactic the users need to properly configure the Tactic [[Mass_Emailing_Module|email module]]. Without proper configuration the module will not be able to send emails properly. The users also need to check their sender and receiver email addresses for better and disruption free emailing procedures. Only the persistence of any error in emailing module configuration and error in sender and receiver emailing addresses can lead towards such difficulties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Leave request management Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic provide an automatic decrease of leave balance upon approval?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is designed to increase the convenience of the users, hence, it is surely capable of decreasing leave balance upon approval. However, before having the leave balance the users need to create type of leaves along with their numbers so that Tactic can easily read the data and update the balance of leaves. For creating type of leaves the users need to follow these steps: Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; [[Dictionary_setup|Dictionaries]] (from the vertical menu bar) -&amp;gt; Type of leaves (From the tables) -&amp;gt; the table containing already existing leaves will be visible -&amp;gt; the users need to add Type of leave, label, value -&amp;gt; Add. The user can also modify an existing leave by clicking on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. After adding the leaves the users will be able to enjoy automatic update of leave balance in Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Product Lots Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is it possible to track an individual product with the help of its lot and serial number?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, it is possible to track a product just with the help of its lot and serial number. For tracking a product you need to go to products menu -&amp;gt; Lots/serial number -&amp;gt; click on the lots and serial lists of the product that you want to track. The lots/serial card will open and you will have to choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show log movement for couple product lot&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The window with all the log movements will open and you can easily track the last activity that has taken place with the product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Manufacturing Order Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add projects in MO modules? If yes then what is the method of accomplishing it?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, projects can certainly be added in the [[Manufacturing_Order_Module|MO module]]. As Tactic’s users are belonging from different types of business originations we understand that the users’ organisation can be associated with mass manufacturing projects. For which it is important to provide the users with the convenience of adding projects in the MO module. In order to add a project in the MO module the users need to go the MRP menu from the main menu bar and then go the manufacturing order menu. They need to choose new manufacturing order for creating new MO. While creating a new MO the users need to select the project from the drop down menu that appears right beside the blank area of adding projects. However, the users need to create projects before attempting to add projects from the dropdown menu. If there is no accurate projects then the users can also create projects from the MO module itself. For creating a new project the users only need to click on the add button (plus sign) and enter all the mandatory information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to use Manufacturing Orders module effectively?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic has an addition of manufacturing order for making it easy for the users who are associated with massive manufacturing works. Tactic makes it easy to keep an official record and a track of all the manufacturing orders within a single space. Hence, it is important to use the Manufacturing orders module effectively. For using this module at its full functionality the users need to configure the module properly. For configuring the MO module the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Product_Module|Product management]] -&amp;gt; Manufacturing orders -&amp;gt; Activate the module -&amp;gt; click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; Perform all the settings as per preference -&amp;gt; Modify. The users can also add complimentary attributes based on their preferences, it is optional. After completing the configuration the users need to click on the MRP menu to access [[Manufacturing_Order_Module|MO module]]. Upon opening the MO module, the users need to choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New manufacturing order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for adding new MO within Tactic. After the MO car opens the users need to add all the important and mandatory information to continue creating a new MO. After creation of an MO the users will easily be able to change the statuses of all the MO. If the MO is still in &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Draft&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; status, it can be modified. Once the status of the MO changes to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Validated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; it cannot be changed anymore. The MO then can be changed as &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Produced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, once the order is produced. The closed or produced MOs can be re-opened as well. For re-opening the MOs the users just need to open the MO card and then click on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;re-open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to manage value transfer in Manufacturing orders module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Manufacturing_Order_Module|Manufacturing Order module]] is initially made for keeping track for the manufacturing orders as well as production. The functionality of automatic update of the value of stock is not attached in MO, however, the users can certainly perform the value transfer manually. For achieving this modification the users can easily use the batch numbers of a specific product while creating an MO. The users at first need to create a BOM with the batch number and then add it while creating the MO. For creating a BOM with the batch number the users need to go to the MRP menu from the main menu bar and then add the batch number at the place of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Label&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Then after creating the BOM the users need to create an MO from the same menu. The steps of creating the MO are: MRP -&amp;gt; Manufacturing orders -&amp;gt; new manufacturing order -&amp;gt; Fill up all the important and mandatory criteria (including choosing the right MO) -&amp;gt; Create. After production the users can correct the stocks by following some steps, which are: Product menu -&amp;gt; Stock -&amp;gt; Movements -&amp;gt; click on the movement code -&amp;gt; correct stock -&amp;gt; Enter information -&amp;gt; Save. After saving all of the value will be transferred manually.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Point Of Sale ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to use the TakePOS module properly?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The POS (Point of Sale) modules have been added to Tactic to be used by the supermarkets or the restaurants. For using [[Point_Of_Sale|TakePOS module]] seamlessly, the first thing that the users require to do is to activate the TakePOS module. Activation of TakePOS module can be performed from the Home and then Setup menu. After activating the module the user need to click on the Cog sign to add the parameters and save those to enjoy the functionalities of the TakePOS module. For activating the module the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; POS TakePos -&amp;gt; Activate -&amp;gt; Click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; Add the parameters -&amp;gt; Add the number of terminals (adding terminals are important to use TakePOS) -&amp;gt; Save -&amp;gt; Configure the terminals (by clicking on the ribbon) -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the users need to open the TakePOS module and add a new cash desk closing. It is important to choose TakePOS as the application and the desired terminal number and click on start. TakePOS will be ready to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Product Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to import new stocks for the products that already exists?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, Tactic allows the users to import new stocks for already existing products through the module &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tools&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. After going to the tools the users need to click on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New import&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Upon choosing this option the users can easily import the files that contain new import for already existing products. However, it is important for the users to list the stock update in a CSV file for working with Tactic more prominently. The users can then update the new stock of the existing products.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to delete products that are added in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic cares about the security and safety of all the important data of the users. Hence, for security purposes the users are not provided with a delete option within the product card, the delete option is mostly disabled. Hence, for deleting a product the users need to delete all the related records beforehand. Related records can include all the invoices, sales orders and projects that are associated with that specific product. The users can start with closing all of the invoices and POS terminals in which the product is used. The users will not be able to delete the product if any of the invoices are still open and the product is used in POS terminals. Hence, for deleting the products the user at first need to go to Billing menu -&amp;gt; (Customer/Vendor) Invoices -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Close all the invoices (Classify paid) (The users cannot delete the invoices for security purposes). The projects need to be deleted as well. For deleting the projects it is important to close them then delete them. The steps for deleting a project are: Project menu -&amp;gt; List of open projects -&amp;gt; click on the associated projects -&amp;gt; close -&amp;gt; delete. For closing the orders the user need to go to Commerce menu -&amp;gt; (Sales orders/ purchase orders) List -&amp;gt; select the order -&amp;gt; Delete. Upon deleting all the records of the product the users can go to the Product menu -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Click on the product that need to be deleted -&amp;gt; Delete (the option will be available).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to disable discounts for some of the products?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
No, it is not possible to disable the discounts for some specific products while having the default discount intact. The users need to change the entire discount to apply it for products.&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Product variant module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add product variant in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Different products have different sizes and different colours, however, same products can also have different sizes and different colours. These are called the product variants, the product variants are added in Tactic with a very short process. However, for creating products and then product variants the users first need to activate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Products&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Product_Variants_Module|Product variant module]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Without activating these modules the users will not be able to create product variants. After activation of these modules the users need to follow some steps, First you have to add the different variants Under the options on Product menu there will be an option called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Variant attributes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; which are: Product menu (From the main menu bar) -&amp;gt; Products -&amp;gt; New Product (as creating new product is necessary to create product variant) -&amp;gt; fill all the mandatory information -&amp;gt; Create -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Select the product for creating variant -&amp;gt; Variant (from the ribbon that appears above the product card) -&amp;gt; New Variant -&amp;gt; Fill the criteria of variant attribute -&amp;gt; Create. New variants for products will be ready after completing this step. However, the users need to create variant attributes first before creating a product variant. For creating a product variant the users need to choose the option of variant attributes and add different attributes by clicking on the plus sign. The users can add different attributes such as colour, sizes and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is it possible to track an individual product with the help of its lot and serial number?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, it is possible to track a product just with the help of its lot and serial number. For tracking a product you need to go to products menu -&amp;gt; Lots/serial number -&amp;gt; click on the lots and serial lists of the product that you want to track. The lots/serial card will open and you will have to choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show log movement for couple product lot&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The window with all the log movements will open and you can easily track the last activity that has taken place with the product.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add product images in product cards? &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is designed for the small, medium sized, as well as the large companies. The business organisations certainly possess a large number of products and those require proper management to enhance the workflow of an organisation. Therefore, it is important to help the business organisation to manage their large number of products without having to face any kind of disruption. This is why the Tactic developers have designed Tactic to easily allow the users add product pictures for better management purpose. However, there is not any direct option to add pictures that is available in other modules, such as members and users. For adding pictures in the product card the users need to go the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link file&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the product that can be opened from the product list. The users of Tactic only need to link the image file with the product and Tactic will automatically add the first added image as the image for the product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Projects or Leads Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can we add projects in MO modules? If yes then what is the method of accomplishing it?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, projects can certainly be added in the [[Manufacturing_Order_Module|Manufacturing order module]]. As Tactic’s users are belonging from different types of business originations we understand that the users’ organisation can be associated with mass manufacturing projects. For which it is important to provide the users with the convenience of adding projects in the MO module. In order to add a project in the MO module the users need to go the MRP menu from the main menu bar and then go the manufacturing order menu. They need to choose new manufacturing order for creating new MO. While creating a new MO the users need to select the project from the drop down menu that appears right beside the blank area of adding projects. However, the users need to create projects before attempting to add projects from the dropdown menu. If there is no accurate projects then the users can also create projects from the MO module itself. For creating a new project the users only need to click on the add button (plus sign) and enter all the mandatory information.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Scheduled jobs Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to set up scheduled jobs in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Scheduled_jobs_Module|Scheduled jobs]] are one of the most helpful objects that can help in scheduling very common yet important jobs that occur within Tactic, such as collecting emails and deleting logs and temporary files. Performing the configuration of scheduled job is quite easy and can be completed within a few click. For setting up scheduled jobs the users need to go to the scheduled job option from Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; Scheduled jobs -&amp;gt; Activate -&amp;gt; Click on the cog sign. Upon clicking on the settings of scheduled jobs the users will be able to get a view of already scheduled jobs. The users can edit those jobs or add new jobs from the plus sign that can be found in the top of the list. Scheduled jobs can be added by filling every mandatory criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Vendor invoice module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a daily, weekly and monthly sales report system in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As for now sales reports cannot be found in Tactic, however, the users can generate a monthly payment report for customers and vendors from the Billing module. The users will be able to generate the payment report for any month just by adding their preferred months. For achieving this the users need to first activate the [[Vendor_invoice_module|invoice module]], by following these steps, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Invoice -&amp;gt; activate -&amp;gt; Billing module -&amp;gt; Vendor invoices/Customer invoices -&amp;gt;  Reporting -&amp;gt; the users then need to choose the months -&amp;gt; Create&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The monthly report will be generated as a PDF format. Tactic generates the reports in a PDF format to eliminate the efforts of the users. The reports can directly be added to the organization’s documents without having to perform any modification and alteration.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can I add a QR code in my invoices?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a QR code to the invoices is not something very complicated. It can be achieved with some small steps. For accomplishing the same you just need to go to Home-&amp;gt; Setup-&amp;gt; other setup. There you can find the blank area, in which you can add your own setup options. In the criterion of name you need to add INVOICE_ADD_ZATCA_QR_CODE and set the value to 1. Then click the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete. After completing Tactic will be generating PDFs with QR codes, when you use the “crabe” or “sponge” templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic support different invoice types based on different country standard?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As it has been stated before that Tactic is designed for eliminating the manual efforts of the customers with the help of digitization. This is what made the Tactic developers develop Tactic as an all in one ERP &amp;amp; CRM solution. Therefore, Tactic certainly supports different types of invoices for providing the users with an excellent and updated services.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can invoice be generated in a PDF format?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic effectively reduces the amount of manual effort that a business organisation or an individual applies in the work process. Hence, it is quite acceptable for Tactic to provide the users with an opportunity of generating the invoices in the PDF format. For accomplishing this the users only need to go to the [[Vendor_invoice_module|invoice module]] from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu the process of generating PDF is: Billing/ Payment menu -&amp;gt; Customer invoice/Vendor invoice -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; Click on the desired invoice -&amp;gt; Linked file -&amp;gt; Generate. After clicking on generate the users will be able to see the generated PDF file in the following area. Upon clicking on the PDF name a pop up will show whether to show or download the file. The users can download the file by choosing the download option easily. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there an option of adding signature in invoices? &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Signatures are an integrated part of invoices, hence, it was important to provide the mandatory feature of adding signature to the users. The users will certainly be able to add signatures, seals and other related elements in the invoices and proposals. For completing this the users need to go through a few steps. The users need to go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Vendor_invoice_module|invoice module]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Free Text on invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be visible under the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;other options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users can enter their signature on the area and it will be used in every invoice that is issues through Tactic. The users can add watermarks as well by adding their watermark in the following criterion called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;watermarks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can the border style in invoice be changed?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic has already provided the users with a number of PDF templates already within its set-up. However, the users may not find those as their preferred PDF templates, and they can easily modify their own PDF template and use that in their invoices. Same can be done with the border style in invoices as well. The users can also achieve the same with the help of GUI as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can we change the invoice number going beyond the default numbering system?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We are afraid that the users cannot change the invoice number going beyond the numbering system all by themselves. As Tactic automatically creates invoices’ number based on the previously completed invoices, it is not possible to change the number of invoices through the software. However, we understand that the users might face situation where they need to change the invoice number for their use. In this case the users can easily contact the Tactic team and ask for assistance. The users can drop a mail at support@alsoft.org from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact the users within 48 hours. However, you can change the invoice number format, if that helps you. For achieving the same you can go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; [[Vendor_invoice_module|invoice module]] -&amp;gt; Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add Tax invoice in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Taxes are one of the most important factors associated with business. Hence, it is necessary to manage all the business related taxes error free. Keeping a record of tax invoices is one of the most effective method of managing all the taxes. This can be performed easily with Tactic.  Adding Tax invoices in tactic can be performed with the combination of a few small steps. The very first step of adding tax invoices in Tactic is associated with visiting Home -&amp;gt; [[#Setting_up_company/_organisation|Company/Organisation]] -&amp;gt; enable taxes as per choice. Tactic allows the users to add up to three different Taxes. After enabling the Taxes the users will be able to enjoy the Tax invoice in the Billing module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a method of adding automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders? If there is a way then how can I accomplish this easily?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As Tactic has been designed for increasing the convenience of the users it is certainly possible for the users to add automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders. For adding automatic terms and conditions the user only have to add those terms and conditions to the public note area and it will be visible in the PDF version of the invoice, contract or proposals. For adding terms and conditions the users need to follow these steps: Commerce menu (for contracts and proposals)/ Billing menu (for invoices) -&amp;gt; List -&amp;gt; select the preferred one -&amp;gt; Notes (from the ribbon) -&amp;gt; Add terms and conditions in public note -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the users need to generate PDF version of that invoice/contract/proposal. The Terms and conditions will be visible. The users can add terms and conditions in the public note area while creating an invoice/contract/proposal as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can numbers to words be added to the invoice within Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There is no direct method available for changing numbers to words. Hence, for enjoying this feature the users need to contact the Tactic Team and place their request for a customised service. For contacting the Tactic team the user need to drop a mail at &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for this paid service. It is important for the users to drop the mail only from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact them within 48 hours and let the users know if their paid request can be processed or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Are there different types of invoices available in the Tactic invoice module?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Different types of invoices are available Tactic based on the activities. There are different invoices such as VAT invoice, TAX invoice, Customer invoice, Vendor invoice and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Tax Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to change or set up new the VAT or TAX rate in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We understand that the Tactic users belong to different nations and regions and the standard VAT and TAX rate set-up will not be same everywhere. Hence, it is important to provide the users with an option of changing the VAT or TAX rates manually. Therefore, changing Tax and VAT rates in Tactic is quite easy. In order to change the default VAT rate the user can go to Home-&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; [[Dictionary_setup|Dictionary setup]] -&amp;gt; VAT rates, then the VAT rates need to be changed with the preferred one. After completing this the users should be able to enjoy the new VAT rates seamlessly within Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add Tax invoice in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Taxes are one of the most important factors associated with business. Hence, it is necessary to manage all the business related taxes error free. Keeping a record of tax invoices is one of the most effective method of managing all the taxes. This can be performed easily with Tactic.  Adding Tax invoices in tactic can be performed with the combination of a few small steps. The very first step of adding tax invoices in Tactic is associated with visiting Home -&amp;gt; Company/Organisation -&amp;gt; enable taxes as per choice. Tactic allows the users to add up to three different Taxes. After enabling the Taxes the users will be able to enjoy the Tax invoice in the Billing module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Third Party module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add native languages for third-parties?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of this Multilanguage settings the users can easily change the default language of their customers and third parties. For activating the Multilanguage settings the users need to go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Display -&amp;gt; Enable Multilanguage support for customer or vendor relationships -&amp;gt; Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the option to use Multilanguage settings seamlessly. The users then need select a default language for the third-parties. For enabling a default language for the third-parties, the users need to follow the steps: (For an already created third party) Third party menu -&amp;gt; List of Customers/Prospects/Vendors -&amp;gt; Click on the desired third party -&amp;gt; Modify -&amp;gt; Language default -&amp;gt; Choose the preferred language -&amp;gt; Save or (For a new third party) Third party menu -&amp;gt; New Customers/Prospects/Vendors -&amp;gt; Fill all the important information -&amp;gt; Language default -&amp;gt; Choose the preferred language -&amp;gt; Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Tickets Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add Tickets from public interface?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tickets are a helpful object that can assist the users in seeking help from the Tactic team regarding several issues. [[Tickets_Module|Tickets]] can be created from inside of Tactic and it can also be created by a public interface. Creating tickets from public interface allow the users to connect with the Tactic team without having to log-into Tactic. For creating tickets from public interface the users need to activate the ticket module at first. For activating the ticket module the users require to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules/ Applications -&amp;gt; Tickets -&amp;gt; Activate the module -&amp;gt; Click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; Public interface tab -&amp;gt; Activate -&amp;gt; there will be a URL visible on the page as &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“A public interface requiring no identification is available at the following URL”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -&amp;gt; The users can copy this URL for future use -&amp;gt; or click on this URL -&amp;gt; The public interface of Ticket creation will be visible -&amp;gt; Create ticket -&amp;gt; Enter all the important information -&amp;gt; New ticket. After completing this procedure the users’ public interface ticket will be ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for User module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to reset admin password?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For changing or resetting the admin password the users need to go to the users section and choose the admin profile. After viewing the admin profile the users need to click on the option of modify and type the new password on the blank area of password. The steps to reach to admin profile are, Home-&amp;gt; User and groups (from the vertical menu bar) -&amp;gt; click on the admin profile from the users list. For changing the admin password go to Modify -&amp;gt; type new password on the blank password area -&amp;gt; Save. Upon saving the modifications the users will be able to rest the admin password easily. For more details you can visit User Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can we limit the access of warehouses from user permission feature?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, the users can limit the access of warehouse from the user permission section of Tactic. Tactic is designed to be used with numerous users under an ultimate admin. The admin decides how much permission to be provided to the users. Hence, it is certainly possible to limit the access of warehouse from Tactic by using user permission set-up. For accomplishing this the users need to go the specific user, whose permissions need to be modified and then go to the section of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[User_Permission|User permission]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the horizontal menu. The list of granted permissions will be visible, from which the users need to find the Stock module and deactivate the permissions related to warehouse. In this way the permissions of warehouses can be limited. However, the users need to remember that there is no way of limiting the access of certain warehouses while granting permissions of other ones. If the permissions are deactivated then the users will be unable to access all of the warehouses and if the permissions are given then the users will be able to access each and every warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic provide the option of customer log-in to update them about their invoices, orders and other important factors?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The users can certainly provide their customer with an option of logging into Tactic with the feature of external user. An external user is the person who is not included within the company. For creating an external user, the user need to create a third-party contact at first. Third party contacts can be created following a few steps: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Third-Party menu (from the main menu bar) -&amp;gt; Contacts/Addresses -&amp;gt; New contacts/addresses -&amp;gt; fill all the mandatory criteria -&amp;gt; Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. After clicking the add options a new contact will be created. Upon creation of the new contact the users will be able to see an option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; under the contact card. The users can transform that contact into a user by clicking on the create user option. There will be a pop up on the page showing the log-in credentials of that external user. The users then need to tap on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;validate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. After validating that contact will be made into an external user. The users then can limit their access from User permission section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Multicurrency Module ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to set-up automatic change of currency from another currency while drafting an invoice/ How to add multicurrency option in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For enabling the option of multicurrency, the users need to go to the multicurrency module, which can be reached by visiting Home -&amp;gt; set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Multicurrency_Module|Multicurrency module]] from the option of Multi-module tools. The users then need to tap on the cog icon that appears on the left of the activation key. Upon clicking on the cog icon the users will be redirected to the settings page of multicurrency. The list of already added currencies will appear under the list, above which a drop down menu of all the available currencies will appear on the left side. The users need to choose their preferred currencies from the list while adding the conversion rate of the new currency from the main currency. For example, if the users have INR set-up as their main currency and what to add USD as new currency then the user need to add the rate of USD that equals 1 INR on the blank &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; box.  After adding the rate the users need to tap the option called &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. With the completion of the process the users will be successful in adding the new currencies easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to questions for Miscellaneous Activities ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can Tactic help your business to grow?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is a paid ERP &amp;amp; CRM software that is designed to ease the manual effort of the business organizations. Tactic is integrated with the help of some modules, which are also the features of the ERP &amp;amp; CRM product. These modules have been constructed keeping consideration of all the business related needs that may be faced by the business operators. Tactic can manage almost every element that is usually associated with a company, such as HRM, accounts, finances, projects, customers, vendors and many more. Hence, it is quite obvious that Tactic can eliminate most of the manual effort as well as can enhance the workflow of an organization by leaving no room for errors. Additionally, Tactic provides a much safer and secure interface to manage data within. Therefore, it is needless to say that Tactic improves business elements, which eventually leads towards a potential and positive growth of business. So, yes, using Tactic will certainly help you in growing your business effectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;What are the mandatory configurations or steps need to be done after first login at Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is sold as a complete admin package. There are some of the mandatory steps that need to be performed by the users before starting to work with Tactic. After logging into Tactic the very first thing that the users need to do is setting up the software as per their needs and requirements. Tactic is integrated with some modules, so, for setting up the software the users need to set up the modules first. For setting up the modules, the admin users need to visit &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; Set up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Upon clicking on the Modules/Applications sections, the users will be able to see the module boxes, the activating button can be turned on to activate a module and can be turned off to deactivate the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to make permissions work in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There are a total of 75 modules presented in Tactic. The admin users need to activate the modules based on their requirements. The User and group module will be activated by default as it cannot be deactivated. After activating the modules the users need to modify their admin username and passwords as per their preferences (the procedure of resetting admin password has been discussed in another question). After completing the procedure the admin users need to create other users while giving them required permissions. &lt;br /&gt;
The importance in permission lies in the fact that the users can only access to the module that they are provided the permission of. The other modules will remain inaccessible to them. For example, the HR manager of the company has nothing to do with the accounts. Hence, the admins can avoid permitting them to the accosting module. Therefore, the HR manager will not be able to access to the accounting module. This is how the permission feature of Tactic works for the benefit of the users and the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to collect log-in credentials for Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is a paid software that requires authentic credentials for starting to work with it. Hence, it is only natural for the software to ask for log-in credentials right after being installed or purchased. The initial log-in credentials will be provided to the valid registered email address of the customer. These log-in credentials can be changed later as per your preferences. If the users are unable to find the log-in credentials, then they need to check their registered emails’ inboxes. If the users cannot find the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Welcome Guide Mail from Tactic&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, then they should check their spam boxes in order to find the mail that contains initial log-in credentials. The users should mark it as safe and add support@alsoft.org  as a contact for future emails to deliver directly in users’ inbox or contact us.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to reset admin password?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For changing or resetting the admin password the users need to go to the users section and choose the admin profile. After viewing the admin profile the users need to click on the option of modify and type the new password on the blank area of password. The steps to reach to admin profile are, Home-&amp;gt; User and groups (from the vertical menu bar) -&amp;gt; click on the admin profile from the users list. For changing the admin password go to Modify -&amp;gt; type new password on the blank password area -&amp;gt; Save. Upon saving the modifications the users will be able to rest the admin password easily. For more details you can visit User Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a NextCloud integration within Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For this moment Tactic does not provide a NextCloud integration. However, there is a method, which can help the users in integrating NextCloud with Tactic. This method encourages enabling the DAV module within Tactic. Upon enabling the DAV module the users need to add the same in NextCloud as an external storage. This will allow the users in transferring files from Tactic to NextCloud seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there an addition of balance sheet and income statement in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic does not provide a balance sheet and income statement feature embedded within it. Tactic developers can develop a module for generating balance sheet and income statement if the majority of the customers require the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to change default time zone in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For changing the default time zone the users do not even need to go outside of Tactic. Changing in default time zone and adding preferable time zone can be easily accomplished by the users. The very first step of completing this process is visiting Home-&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; [[Other_setup|Other Setup]]. The users will be able to find a list of configuration options upon clicking on the other setup. At the Other Setup page users can see a table having fields called, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name, Value, Comment and Modify date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users need to add &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_SERVER_TZ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the place of name and the name of the nation or time zone in the area of value. The area of comment need to be fulfilled inputting &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Corrected Timezone Parameter&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. For available list of Time Zones users may visit [[Tactic_Time-zones|Tactic time Zones]]. Lastly the users need to click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. The corrected time zone will work in Tactic after completing this step.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there an inventory available for the warehouses in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic has certainly been designed to reduce manual efforts of the users with the help of digitisation. We understand that inventory is an integrated part of warehouse management. However, for current version Tactic is unable to provide an inventory settings as it takes a good amount of time and Tactic developers could not wait to reduce the manual efforts of the organisations and business operators during this era of pandemic. Hence, we are looking into it and our developers are working quite hard to provide the customers with an inventory management system in Tactic later versions.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can the PDF templates be modified?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic already has some default PDF templates, with which the invoices, the expense reports and other important documents are generated. However, the already added PDF templates may not be ideal and standard for the users always. Hence, for giving the full authority of using Tactic as easily as the users like, the Tactic developers have provided the facility of modifying PDF templates. For modifying PDF templates the users need to go to any module that has the feature of PDF generation (e.g. Invoice module). The user need to follow some steps, which are: Home -&amp;gt; Set-up -&amp;gt; Modules/Applications -&amp;gt; [[Customer_Invoice_Module|Invoice module]] -&amp;gt; Click on the cog sign that appears at the right side of the Module box -&amp;gt; from the set-up page of Invoice, the users need to go the section of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice documents models&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -&amp;gt; Turn on the option of ODT/ODS templates -&amp;gt; Upload the modified template from the upload section. The users will be able to use their modified PDF templates after uploading the new template. While generating PDF they only need to change the default PDF template by clicking on the dropdown menu and choosing their modified template.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Does Tactic allow customer portal plugin?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For now, Tactic does not provide a customer portal plugin. However, the tactic developers will look forward to design a plugin if the customer requirements are high.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Can extra fields be computed in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Extra fields can certainly be computed in Tactic. However, for proceeding with the procedure the users requires to possess a good command over programming, otherwise computing extra fields are almost impossible. As it is a developing based job, the users need to contact the experts through Tactic forum to get the job done. Hence, if the users need to compute extra fields they can contact the Tactic team by dropping a mail at &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the registered email ID. However, the users need to remember that it is a paid service, for which the users need to pay extra.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can I change the name of a menu item?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As it is known that Tactic is used by customers belonging from different nations and having different language or different accent of same language, there can be some of the elements within Tactic, which are referred differently. Such as commercial proposals are called quota in India. Hence, keeping the consideration of the users who might look forward to change the name of the menus, Tactic has provided an easy interface to change the names of the menu. For modifying the name of the menu the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Menu, then change the menu handler to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;auguria_menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The user then need to put the new name of the menu in the criteria of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Title&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users will be able to change the name by saving the new title easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a method of adding automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders? If there is a way then how can I accomplish this easily?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
As Tactic has been designed for increasing the convenience of the users it is certainly possible for the users to add automatic terms and conditions in the proposals, contracts and the orders. For adding automatic terms and conditions the user only have to add those terms and conditions to the public note area and it will be visible in the PDF version of the invoice, contract or proposals. For adding public note the user need to open that invoice/contract/proposal and then click on modify to add public note from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Upon adding the note the users will be able to see the public note visible in their invoice/contract/proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Is there a multi-company module available in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is initially designed to be managed only one company and there is no feature in the basic version of Tactic to manage more than one companies. However, it is not at all an impossible addition. Multi-company module can be added as a customisation request. For adding the Multi-company module the users to drop a mail at support@alsoft.org for this paid service. It is important for the users to drop the mail only from their registered email address. The Tactic team will contact them within 48 hour and let the users know about the preparation of adding Multi-company module to their Tactic account.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to add line number on product, shipment, contact, orders, third parties etc. in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The contacts, orders, third parties, shipments etc. in Tactic is integrated with several lines. Without adding those lines it is impossible to validate the shipments, contacts and other important objects. However, the default settings of Tactic does not show line numbers in those areas. Hence, the users need to go through a small process for adding line product, shipment, contact, orders, third parties etc. in Tactic.  For achieving this the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Other setup -&amp;gt; add &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAIN_VIEW_LINE_NUMBER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the place of name -&amp;gt; add 1 at the place of value -&amp;gt; Save. After saving the users will be able to see line numbers in product, shipment, contact, orders, third parties etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can I change the date format?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The default date format of Tactic depends on the language set-up itself. Tactic will show the date format according to the selected language. For example, if the default language is set as English US then the date format will be as the MM/DD/YY. The default date format of Tactic can be changed by going to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Display and changing the language to the native language. For an example if the users change the default language to English India, then the default dating format will be DD/MM/YY. However, if the users are still not able to change in date format then they can easily take assistance from the Tactic team. For achieving assistance the users need to drop a mail at support@alsoft.org. It should be remembered by the users that they need to drop mail from their registered email ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;What should I do if I cannot log into Tactic from my IP address?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There is almost zero chances of such an error to occur with Tactic. Our customers are our first priority and no error can happen with their IP addresses. However, if the users still face difficulties in logging into their Tactic account through a specific IP address then the users should contact Tactic support team. The users can drop their mails at support@alsoft.org by their registered email ID. The Tactic team will contact the users within 48 hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;What does “Expired security token” mean and how to solve it?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For understanding expired security token, it is important to understand the meaning of security token at first as well as its importance in ERP &amp;amp; CRM software. Tactic uses a CSRF token, Cross Site Request Forgery, for safe guarding users’ data. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cross Site Request Forgery&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is one kind of malicious activity that are performed by implementing unauthorized commands on behalf of an authorized user. Hence, for preventing such malicious activities and for saving the data of the users Tactic uses a CSRF token, here the token stands for an active user session that is managed by Tactic. This token makes sure that the activities are performed by the users themselves and not by any unauthorized user. Hence, expired security token stands for expired user session. Tactic sends this messages when the user session is expired and some kind of activities are still being performed within Tactic. &lt;br /&gt;
Solving this issue is not something complicated. When the users face these type of issues they can try to clear their browser cache to resolve this issue. It is most likely to be solved after cache clearance. However, if the users still face the same issues then they can contact the Tactic support by dropping a mail at: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;support@alsoft.org&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How can I change the logo from the log-in page?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic is designed for increasing the efficiency and workflow of the organisations. And increase in workflow and efficiency certainly deserves a good appearance, to attract the third parties, such as customers, vendors, stakeholders and more. When the third-parties log-into Tactic as an external user, they need to be welcomed by the company, which is virtually possible by showing the company logo along with a welcome messages. All of these can be added in Tactic manually by following a few steps. The users need to go to company or organisation settings from set-up and add the company logo at the field of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company logo&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users will be able to see their company logo as a favicon at the log-in page.  The users can also add specific messages in the area of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Message of the Day&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; area.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to connect a VPN to Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting a VPN to Tactic is quite easy, the users do not have to perform any extra configuration. For connecting the VPN the users only need to install the VPN software and then run it. After connecting the PC to the VPN the users need to type Tactic URL in the browser. Then log-in into Tactic with appropriate credentials. If Tactic opens normally then the VPN is successfully connected to the software. If it does not then the users need to check their bowser settings and modify those if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to change maximum size of uploading files in Tactic?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The users have been provided with the facility of uploading their important business related files within Tactic for enhancing their experience of using Tactic as a compact ERP &amp;amp; CRM service. There is a limit of maximum size for uploading file, which have been set by Tactic. However, we understand that the users may need to increase the size limit since important files can be bigger than the maximum size. Hence, Tactic allows the users to change the limit for maximum size of uploading files as per their preferences. For changing the maximum size of uploading files the users need to go to Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Security -&amp;gt; Files (upload). The users then will be able to see the parameters of the maximum size of uploading files. A maximum of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;40960 Kb&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is allowed by default, the users can change the value to any size keeping consideration of the (web server upload limit) limit. After clicking the option of modify the users can easily use the new maximum size of file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;h3 style=&amp;quot;color:#006799;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;How to allow any or rich HTML content inside the Tactic WYSIWYG editor?&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic comes with an integrated CMS (Content Management System), which allows you to manage your website content right from Tactic’s interface without having to opt for a third-party software. Hence, very naturally, you can find a WYSIWYG editor for editing content and so on. However, Tactic restricts you from adding rich HTML or any kind of HTML content by default. For changing this setting, you need to add a global key to the other setup of your Tactic ERP and CRM software. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For adding the same you need to follow a few steps. At first you need to access &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; other setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Once the other setup page opens, you will get to see a table containing various keys and values. Under the criterion ‘name’ you need to put down &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“FCKEDITOR_ALLOW_ANY_CONTENT”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and then under value put down a 1. You can add comment as per your liking. Once you are done doing so, click on “Add”. Your key will be added to Tactic ERP and CRM. Now you can easily add rich or any HTML content in Tactic’s WYSIWYG editor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any time you want to turn it off, just change the value from 1 to 0 and Tactic will start restricting HTML content again.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Scheduled_jobs_Module&amp;diff=3635</id>
		<title>Scheduled jobs Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Scheduled_jobs_Module&amp;diff=3635"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T07:07:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Setting up Monthly Frequency */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Organisations are associated with different types of jobs, scheduling the jobs increases the workflow as well as enhances organisational performance. Scheduled jobs are different from tasks and projects. Hence, it is important to keep a track of the all the scheduled jobs.  Tactic provides the user in managing projects or tasks and scheduled jobs separately. For this purpose the developers of Tactic have developed scheduled job module. &amp;#039;&amp;#039; This module helps the users in managing scheduled jobs in a better and more organised manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services. &lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module for accessing the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduled_jobs_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduled_jobs_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting up Monthly Frequency ==&lt;br /&gt;
The users are now allowed to set monthly frequency in the course of scheduled job or cron task. For achieving the same you need to open the scheduled job by going to home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; scroll to the end of the page -&amp;gt; system -&amp;gt; scheduled jobs -&amp;gt; click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; scheduled jobs tab -&amp;gt; click on the preferred job or click on the plus sign (on the top right corner of the page) to add a new job -&amp;gt; click on edit if you are choosing an existing job -&amp;gt; execute job each -&amp;gt; add the frequency and choose the ‘monthly’ option -&amp;gt; click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cron-task-schedule-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cron-task-schedule-2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cron-task-schedule-3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cron-task-schedule-4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Management of Scheduled Jobs =&lt;br /&gt;
Management of scheduled job is an admin tool that need to be managed by a user who holds an admin account. Without an admin account it is impossible to manage scheduled job. The scheduled jobs can be edited and deleted by tapping on the labels of the jobs and choosing the options of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduled_jobs_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduled_jobs_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduled_jobs_5.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Configuration of scheduled jobs module =&lt;br /&gt;
The parameter that can be changed about this module is the security key that is used in the URL for launching cron jobs. The users need to visit the area of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;scheduled jobs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Admin tools&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from home tab. However, this module needs to be activated after each five minutes. However, it depends on the environment in which the software is running.&lt;br /&gt;
== UNIX environment ==&lt;br /&gt;
On UNIX window the users need to activate the module after each five minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
== Windows environment ==&lt;br /&gt;
In windows environment the users need to create new tasks in window task calendar. The users need to run windows with maximum permissions. Choosing trigger according to PC. Then the users need to start the program script for finding the security keys. Upon performing all the important tasks, a command in windows will be executed. This command will execute php, which will be launching work progresses of planned jobs of Tactic.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Cron-task-schedule-4.PNG&amp;diff=3634</id>
		<title>File:Cron-task-schedule-4.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Cron-task-schedule-4.PNG&amp;diff=3634"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T07:06:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Cron-task-schedule-3.PNG&amp;diff=3633</id>
		<title>File:Cron-task-schedule-3.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Cron-task-schedule-3.PNG&amp;diff=3633"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T07:06:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Cron-task-schedule-2.PNG&amp;diff=3632</id>
		<title>File:Cron-task-schedule-2.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Cron-task-schedule-2.PNG&amp;diff=3632"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T07:06:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Cron-task-schedule-1.PNG&amp;diff=3631</id>
		<title>File:Cron-task-schedule-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Cron-task-schedule-1.PNG&amp;diff=3631"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T07:06:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Poll,_Survey_or_Vote_Module&amp;diff=3630</id>
		<title>Poll, Survey or Vote Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Poll,_Survey_or_Vote_Module&amp;diff=3630"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:56:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Adding a comment to a poll */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Polls are considered to be one of the most effective methods of engaging audiences by attracting their attention towards a specific matter. Polls can be used for understanding the views of the employees regarding certain important matter of the organisation as well. Hence, having a poll feature in the ERP &amp;amp; CRM software can be helpful for the organisation to engage their employees with more effectiveness. Therefore, Tactic introduces a Poll module to enhance the user experience. &amp;#039;&amp;#039; With the help of this module the users can easily create polls to engage employees and users. The polls can be created along with specifying time limit for keeping the voting facilities open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services. &lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module for accessing the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of a poll =&lt;br /&gt;
For creating a poll the users need to go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tools&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module. Creation of a poll can be performed by selecting the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Poll&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Poll&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section. The users need to create the poll by selecting from one from two predefined options, which are, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; poll and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; poll. Upon choosing the poll type, the users has to fill all the information related to the poll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Poll.PNG|center|link=]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Poll_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Poll_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Poll_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Poll_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Poll_5.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can invite your users to join the survey by sending a clickable link via emails. The emails will be sent to all the participants. The link is also generated in the poll or survey card, so that it can be accessed easily anytime. The number of votes received is shown in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“results”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Modifying a poll =&lt;br /&gt;
The polls can be modified by clicking on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Poll_6.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting a poll =&lt;br /&gt;
The polls can be deleted by clicking on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Poll_7.PNG|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Adding a comment to a poll =&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to add a comment to the polls or surveys, you can now do it after the poll is closed. At first access the poll by going to Tools -&amp;gt; poll -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the preferred closed poll -&amp;gt; scroll towards the end of the page -&amp;gt; add your comment at the designated box -&amp;gt; you can edit your name if you want -&amp;gt; click on ‘add comment’. Your comment will be added to the poll just this easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adding-comments-to-poll-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Adding-comments-to-poll-1.PNG&amp;diff=3629</id>
		<title>File:Adding-comments-to-poll-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Adding-comments-to-poll-1.PNG&amp;diff=3629"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:55:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Event_Organization&amp;diff=3628</id>
		<title>Event Organization</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Event_Organization&amp;diff=3628"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:50:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Exporting an ICS File */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
Events and conferences are common occurrences in any business while managing those properly is a critical need. Managing an event manually means allowing several loopholes as well as taking a lot of time. And here digitization can help. Tactic provides its users with an entire event organization module, that helps you in creating and managing events for your company easily and efficiently. &lt;br /&gt;
= What does event organization module do =&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of tasks, for accomplishing which you can use Tactic’s event organization module. The tasks are mentioned below, &lt;br /&gt;
* You can create and manage &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;summits, congresses, forums, training campaigns, DevCamps&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and more. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can collect ideas and votes for specific matter with the help of event organization.&lt;br /&gt;
* Collection of payments can be achieved with the help of this module as well. &lt;br /&gt;
* Managing conferences are easy with the help of this module.  &lt;br /&gt;
* If any of your event requires registration fee you can also collect that with the help of this module. &lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services.&lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= List of parameters associated with the module =&lt;br /&gt;
These parameters are a part of module set-up. The users can either enable or disable these parameters for using the Event Organization module as per their preferences. For enabling these parameters follow the following steps,&lt;br /&gt;
*	Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules and applications&lt;br /&gt;
*	Go to the Event Organization module &lt;br /&gt;
*	Click on the cog sign to open the settings &lt;br /&gt;
*	Click on “modify” to modify the parameters as per your own liking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_12.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Click on “save” after you are done with the modification&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_13.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 1. Creating task labels automatically when validating a project is done ==&lt;br /&gt;
As per your preferences you can define a list of standard tasks, which will be created automatically by Tactic once a new event is validated. &lt;br /&gt;
== 2. Adding tags to third parties automatically when a conference is suggested ==&lt;br /&gt;
If there is any specific tag that you want the third parties to be added to you can define it in the configuration area. These tags will be automatically added to the third parties when a conference is suggested with the submission of a public form. &lt;br /&gt;
== 3. Adding tags to third parties automatically when a booth is suggested ==&lt;br /&gt;
If there is any specific tag that you want the third parties to be added to you can define it in the configuration area. These tags will be automatically added to the third parties when a booth is suggested with the submission of a public form.&lt;br /&gt;
== 4. Add and restrict attendees by tag or category ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can freely add and restrict third parties in your created events with the help of tags. Just mentioning the tag or category will be enough to add or restrict the entire group of third party easily. &lt;br /&gt;
== 5. Add and restrict attendees by nature ==&lt;br /&gt;
Just like with the help of tags, the users can add and restrict third parties based on their nature as well. For example, if you want to add only prospects then you can add prospect in the configuration area and Tactic will add only prospects to the created events. &lt;br /&gt;
== 6. Template of the email to be sent after a conference suggestion is received ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the template of the email that is needed to be sent after a conference suggestion is received. &lt;br /&gt;
== 7. Template of the email to be sent after a booth suggestion is received ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the template of the email that is needed to be sent after a booth suggestion is received. &lt;br /&gt;
== 8. Template of the email to be sent after a payment for conference/ booth registration is received ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the template of the email that is needed to be sent after registration fee for booth/ conference is received. &lt;br /&gt;
The above-mentioned parameters are the primary ones. There are some other parameters as well, such as Service used for the invoice row about a booth location, Service used for the invoice row about an attendee subscription to an event and Seed to secure the key for the public registration page to suggest a conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creating a new event =&lt;br /&gt;
For creating a new event you need to follow the below-mentioned steps, &lt;br /&gt;
* First you need to choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“Projects”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu from the main menu bar &lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“Organized events”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the sub menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“new”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the options that appear under the sub menu&lt;br /&gt;
* Fill all the needed criteria &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“create draft”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After that your draft event will be created and you can validate it as per you need. &lt;br /&gt;
* For validating the draft even, just click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“validate”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
== Add an attendee ==&lt;br /&gt;
* After you validate the event, you can add attendees by opening the event from the list view, which can be done by clicking on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“list”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on your desired event and it will open &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“+”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add an attendee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_5.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fill all the important criteria and click on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“create”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_6.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The attendee will be added to the event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add date and location ==&lt;br /&gt;
Adding the event date and the location can be easily achieved with a few steps now in Tactic. All you need to do is to open the event organization sub menu by click on the Project icon from the main menu, then choose list and browse through the already created events. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Date-location-of-event-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add a new event then you can click on New and fill in all the criteria, where you will find the blank space for event location and date. You can add the important details and hit create draft. If you want to modify a created event, you can do so by opening the event card, clicking on modify and adding the information. Lastly, clicking on save will save your event location and date easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for event organization = &lt;br /&gt;
Understanding the workflow of the events is important to manage those properly with the help of Tactic. &lt;br /&gt;
* If an event is in &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;draft&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, it means the event is not yet ready to be published. &lt;br /&gt;
* If an event is &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;suggested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, it means it is not confirmed by the visitors’ votes &lt;br /&gt;
* If an event is &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;confirmed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, it means it is available to be booked. &lt;br /&gt;
* If an event is not &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;qualified&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, it means the votes are not enough to confirm an event &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Done&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; means the event is over  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cancelled&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; means the event has been cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
you can change the status of the event by modifying the conference card. You can manually change the status by clicking on the drop-down arrow and choosing the status of the event and then saving it. The new status will reflect on the conference card. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_9.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_10.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_11.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Exporting an ICS File =&lt;br /&gt;
The users can now export ICS file of an event by only clicking on a link. For downloading the ICS file of an event, you need to follow a few simple steps, which are presented below: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At first you need to access event organization by going to Home -&amp;gt; Projects and collaborating works -&amp;gt; Event Organization. You can now click on the ‘list’ option to open the list of all available events. Once you are done choosing the event you want to work with, you will see a criterion called “Link ICS for conferences”, the link of download will be provided available here. All you need to do is to click on the link and let Tactic download the ICS file for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exporting-ics-file-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exporting-ics-file-2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting an event =&lt;br /&gt;
For deleting an event, you need to go to the event list from the option, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“conference or booth”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, which is located in the side menu bar. Click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“list”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option and choose the desired conference or booth from the list. Click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“delete”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button after opening the event card, which will lead towards the deletion of the conference or booth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_14.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Exporting-ics-file-2.PNG&amp;diff=3627</id>
		<title>File:Exporting-ics-file-2.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Exporting-ics-file-2.PNG&amp;diff=3627"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:48:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Exporting-ics-file-1.PNG&amp;diff=3626</id>
		<title>File:Exporting-ics-file-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Exporting-ics-file-1.PNG&amp;diff=3626"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:48:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Event_Organization&amp;diff=3625</id>
		<title>Event Organization</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Event_Organization&amp;diff=3625"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:43:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Add date and location */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
Events and conferences are common occurrences in any business while managing those properly is a critical need. Managing an event manually means allowing several loopholes as well as taking a lot of time. And here digitization can help. Tactic provides its users with an entire event organization module, that helps you in creating and managing events for your company easily and efficiently. &lt;br /&gt;
= What does event organization module do =&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of tasks, for accomplishing which you can use Tactic’s event organization module. The tasks are mentioned below, &lt;br /&gt;
* You can create and manage &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;summits, congresses, forums, training campaigns, DevCamps&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and more. &lt;br /&gt;
* You can collect ideas and votes for specific matter with the help of event organization.&lt;br /&gt;
* Collection of payments can be achieved with the help of this module as well. &lt;br /&gt;
* Managing conferences are easy with the help of this module.  &lt;br /&gt;
* If any of your event requires registration fee you can also collect that with the help of this module. &lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services.&lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= List of parameters associated with the module =&lt;br /&gt;
These parameters are a part of module set-up. The users can either enable or disable these parameters for using the Event Organization module as per their preferences. For enabling these parameters follow the following steps,&lt;br /&gt;
*	Home -&amp;gt; Setup -&amp;gt; Modules and applications&lt;br /&gt;
*	Go to the Event Organization module &lt;br /&gt;
*	Click on the cog sign to open the settings &lt;br /&gt;
*	Click on “modify” to modify the parameters as per your own liking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_12.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Click on “save” after you are done with the modification&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_13.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 1. Creating task labels automatically when validating a project is done ==&lt;br /&gt;
As per your preferences you can define a list of standard tasks, which will be created automatically by Tactic once a new event is validated. &lt;br /&gt;
== 2. Adding tags to third parties automatically when a conference is suggested ==&lt;br /&gt;
If there is any specific tag that you want the third parties to be added to you can define it in the configuration area. These tags will be automatically added to the third parties when a conference is suggested with the submission of a public form. &lt;br /&gt;
== 3. Adding tags to third parties automatically when a booth is suggested ==&lt;br /&gt;
If there is any specific tag that you want the third parties to be added to you can define it in the configuration area. These tags will be automatically added to the third parties when a booth is suggested with the submission of a public form.&lt;br /&gt;
== 4. Add and restrict attendees by tag or category ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can freely add and restrict third parties in your created events with the help of tags. Just mentioning the tag or category will be enough to add or restrict the entire group of third party easily. &lt;br /&gt;
== 5. Add and restrict attendees by nature ==&lt;br /&gt;
Just like with the help of tags, the users can add and restrict third parties based on their nature as well. For example, if you want to add only prospects then you can add prospect in the configuration area and Tactic will add only prospects to the created events. &lt;br /&gt;
== 6. Template of the email to be sent after a conference suggestion is received ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the template of the email that is needed to be sent after a conference suggestion is received. &lt;br /&gt;
== 7. Template of the email to be sent after a booth suggestion is received ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the template of the email that is needed to be sent after a booth suggestion is received. &lt;br /&gt;
== 8. Template of the email to be sent after a payment for conference/ booth registration is received ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the template of the email that is needed to be sent after registration fee for booth/ conference is received. &lt;br /&gt;
The above-mentioned parameters are the primary ones. There are some other parameters as well, such as Service used for the invoice row about a booth location, Service used for the invoice row about an attendee subscription to an event and Seed to secure the key for the public registration page to suggest a conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creating a new event =&lt;br /&gt;
For creating a new event you need to follow the below-mentioned steps, &lt;br /&gt;
* First you need to choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“Projects”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu from the main menu bar &lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“Organized events”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the sub menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“new”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; from the options that appear under the sub menu&lt;br /&gt;
* Fill all the needed criteria &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“create draft”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* After that your draft event will be created and you can validate it as per you need. &lt;br /&gt;
* For validating the draft even, just click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“validate”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
== Add an attendee ==&lt;br /&gt;
* After you validate the event, you can add attendees by opening the event from the list view, which can be done by clicking on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“list”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on your desired event and it will open &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“+”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add an attendee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_5.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fill all the important criteria and click on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“create”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_6.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The attendee will be added to the event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add date and location ==&lt;br /&gt;
Adding the event date and the location can be easily achieved with a few steps now in Tactic. All you need to do is to open the event organization sub menu by click on the Project icon from the main menu, then choose list and browse through the already created events. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Date-location-of-event-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add a new event then you can click on New and fill in all the criteria, where you will find the blank space for event location and date. You can add the important details and hit create draft. If you want to modify a created event, you can do so by opening the event card, clicking on modify and adding the information. Lastly, clicking on save will save your event location and date easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Workflow for event organization = &lt;br /&gt;
Understanding the workflow of the events is important to manage those properly with the help of Tactic. &lt;br /&gt;
* If an event is in &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;draft&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, it means the event is not yet ready to be published. &lt;br /&gt;
* If an event is &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;suggested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, it means it is not confirmed by the visitors’ votes &lt;br /&gt;
* If an event is &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;confirmed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, it means it is available to be booked. &lt;br /&gt;
* If an event is not &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;qualified&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, it means the votes are not enough to confirm an event &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Done&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; means the event is over  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cancelled&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; means the event has been cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
you can change the status of the event by modifying the conference card. You can manually change the status by clicking on the drop-down arrow and choosing the status of the event and then saving it. The new status will reflect on the conference card. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_9.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_10.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_11.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Exporting an ICS File =&lt;br /&gt;
The users can now export ICS file of an event by only clicking on a link. For downloading the ICS file of an event, you need to follow a few simple steps, which are presented below: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At first you need to access event organization by going to Home -&amp;gt; Projects and collaborating works -&amp;gt; Event Organization. You can now click on the ‘list’ option to open the list of all available events. Once you are done choosing the event you want to work with, you will see a criterion called “Link ICS for conferences”, the link of download will be provided available here. All you need to do is to click on the link and let Tactic download the ICS file for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting an event =&lt;br /&gt;
For deleting an event, you need to go to the event list from the option, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“conference or booth”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, which is located in the side menu bar. Click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“list”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option and choose the desired conference or booth from the list. Click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“delete”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button after opening the event card, which will lead towards the deletion of the conference or booth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Event_organization_14.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Date-location-of-event-1.PNG&amp;diff=3624</id>
		<title>File:Date-location-of-event-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Date-location-of-event-1.PNG&amp;diff=3624"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:42:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Product_Module&amp;diff=3623</id>
		<title>Product Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Product_Module&amp;diff=3623"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:38:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Adding stocks and inventory */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Products are the main feature of a business organisation. Therefore, managing the products effectively is necessary to enhance the performance of an organisation. However, a simple error in product management can cause huge issues within a company. This is why, Tactic ERP &amp;amp; CRM software introduces product module to manage all the products at a single space without having to face much complexity. The users will be able to add product variants as well. This will certain help the users by decreasing their manual effort by a good amount. &amp;#039;&amp;#039; This module of Tactic manages the product catalogue for increasing the positive experience of the users. This module helps in managing all of the important aspects that is needed to enrich the organisational business environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services. &lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= What is a product =&lt;br /&gt;
Product is an object that is sold by an organisation to the customers or it can be sold to the organisations by the vendors as well. The organisation can easily stock products in warehouses (which can be recorded in Tactic Warehouse and Stock module). Hence, an organisation will easily be able to track products within an easy interface through Tactic. Moreover, Tactic will help the users in tracking shipments quite easily as well, as products and shipments go hand in hand. The users will also be able to input the value of products and see them listed in the Tactic ERP &amp;amp; CRM software as well. For more specifications that users will be able to input the weights, sizes and important codes, such as customs code, commodity code and license code. &lt;br /&gt;
== Virtual product ==&lt;br /&gt;
With the emergence of technology, products have changed their attires as well. These days, products do not need to have physical dimensions to be sold. These type of goods or products are called the virtual products or digital goods. These virtual products or digital goods can include non-tangible elements, such as membership services, warranties, subscriptions, ERP &amp;amp; CRM software, videos, music and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Management of sales prices in Tactic =&lt;br /&gt;
There are some methods of managing the sales prices within Tactic ERP &amp;amp; CRM software, these methods are: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Each products having a specific price &lt;br /&gt;
*	Different prices for different customer segments &lt;br /&gt;
*	Different prices for different customers &lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity based prices &lt;br /&gt;
As for the product prices based on the segment of customers, Tactic allows 5 groups of customers or 5 customer segments. However, the customers cannot be added to more than one segment for the same time being. Hence, the users need to keep that under consideration while adding the customers in segments.  The customers will be sold the products according to the prices that is defined in the customer segment.&lt;br /&gt;
== Updating multiple product prices ==&lt;br /&gt;
If your company is increasing product prices and you are worrying over how you need to update every price manually by going from product card to product card, then you don’t need to think too much about it all. You can now update prices of multiple products at once by running a mass-action. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At first, you need to open the product list by going to home -&amp;gt; product -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; check the boxes of preferred products -&amp;gt; now go to the select action box and click on the drop down arrow -&amp;gt; at the end of the drop down list you will find an option called ‘increase/decrease customer price -&amp;gt; choose that and click on confirm. Now another new box will open at the beginning of the page. The first box will ask for rate. You need to choose a negative rate if you want to decrease the price and choose normal rating if the prices are to be increased. Once you are done with choosing the rate click on validate. The selling prices will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-price-update-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-price-update-2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-price-update-3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-price-update-4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of a new product =&lt;br /&gt;
From the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;product&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Product&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; need to be selected. All the important information about the products need to be incorporated by filling all the criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The products are always sorted by the product reference. The references associated with only numbers get the first reference and then it comes the alphabets. The product variants are included in this list as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The products can be shown according to a sort order on units lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_1.PNG|center|link=]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modification can be done by by clicking the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Categories ==&lt;br /&gt;
With the assistance of Tactic, the users will be able to add the products in one or more categories. However, for categorizing the products the users must create categories beforehand. &lt;br /&gt;
== Product variants ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creation of product variants ===  &lt;br /&gt;
Product variants need to be created by going to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Product&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module in Tactic. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Variant Attribute&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be selected for creating variants for a specific product. All the related fields need to be filled for better users’ experience. However, it is important to add an existing product first to create product variant.The modification of a product label is reflected in all the places that the product is associated with. This includes the child label of product variants as well. If you change a product label, the labels of product variants will change as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic now offers you with the facility of forcing the product references. You can add reference number to your products in the way you like. For accomplishing this, all you need to do is to go to the product card by going through the steps of products &amp;amp; services (from main menu) -&amp;gt; products -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned product -&amp;gt; modify -&amp;gt; the field of product reference will be shown at the beginning of the product card -&amp;gt; modify it as per your liking -&amp;gt; save. The modified product reference will be saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pro_var_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pro_var_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modifying product variants === &lt;br /&gt;
Modification of a product variant need to be performed by going to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option. After modifying the users need to save the new information.     &lt;br /&gt;
=== Deleting product variants ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be chosen for deleting a product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Modifying a product =&lt;br /&gt;
Product information can be modified by going to the list view of existing products. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be selected in order to modify the information.&lt;br /&gt;
= Cloning products =&lt;br /&gt;
Cloning products is a subject to require confirmation. While you are cloning a product, you need to visit the product card and click the “clone” option to make it work. when you click on the cloning option, a confirmation box will open. There will be a filed suggesting the name of the copied product, which can be changed as per the user preference. Then you need to click on “yes” if you want to continue cloning the product. Once you are done cloning, the product will be created the draft status, which you can validate later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cloning_products_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cloning_products_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cloning_products_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are cloning a product, you can define its product reference in the confirmation box. The product reference will show-up as “copy-xxx”, which you can change easily by typing the new reference in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While a product is cloned, the categories that the linked with the said product will be cloned alongside as well. The categories can be changed later on, while the cloned product is still in the draft status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Adding stocks and inventory =&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic offers a separate stock module for helping the companies out with product stock. This stock module allows the users to add product stock to manage the products in a better manner. Warehouses can be added as well. The users can define stocks based on the warehouses, stock limits and many other features to make product management more convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating inventories are now even easier. You can, now, create inventory only with the product category. All you need to do is to access the inventory menu by going to home -&amp;gt; products and services main menu -&amp;gt; inventory -&amp;gt; new. Once the inventory form opens you will see the last criterion, where you can add the product category to create the inventory, choose the preferred category there and hit create.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-category-to-create-inventory-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That’s it. You have now successfully created an inventory out of product category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Adding a default warehouse =&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a default warehouse to the products is easy with the help of Tactic. The steps that you need to follow for accomplishing so are provided below, products &amp;amp; services (from main menu) -&amp;gt; products -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned product -&amp;gt; modify -&amp;gt; the field of default warehouse will be shown in the middle of the page, you need to choose the default warehouse by clicking on the drop-down menu and choosing the preferred warehouses -&amp;gt; save. After saving the default warehouse will be determined by Tactic and every stock dispatch of that specific product will take place only through the determined warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are in need of monitoring stocks but are short in time to check each warehouse individually then you can use Tactic’s new feature where you can select multiple warehouses to view a stock of a date of past. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For achieving the same you need to first go to the warehouse module by going to home -&amp;gt; products and services main menu -&amp;gt; warehouses submenu -&amp;gt; stock at date. Once the stock at date page opens, go to the box designated for warehouses and click on the blank space to open the drop-down menu. Now choose the warehouses you need to work with and click on refresh. Don’t forget to add the date before clicking on the refresh button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, you will see all the stock details at the page. Now you can monitor it all without any issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Adding default BOM =&lt;br /&gt;
Just as default warehouse, default BOM can be added to the products, that too very easily. The mentioned steps need to be followed for achieving the same, &lt;br /&gt;
products &amp;amp; services (from main menu) -&amp;gt; products -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned product -&amp;gt; modify -&amp;gt; the field of default BOM will be shown in the middle of the page, you need to choose the default BOM by clicking on the drop-down menu and choosing the preferred warehouses -&amp;gt; save. The default BOM for that particular product will be determined by Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Using personalized fields =&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a field that requires to be associated with your company’s products and services; however, if Tactic does not offer that field by default, then you can add your personalized field to that products and services by yourself. These personalized fields are also gone by the name of extra-fields. For adding the personalized fields or the extra-fields the users need to follow a few steps, which are, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; product management -&amp;gt; products/services -&amp;gt; click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; complementary attribute -&amp;gt; new attribute -&amp;gt; fill all the important criteria -&amp;gt; save. The new field will be created in Tactic’s products/service module easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_extrafield_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_extrafield_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_extrafield_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_extrafield_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting a product =&lt;br /&gt;
As long as a product is engaged with different invoices, warehouses and more a product cannot be deleted.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-category-to-create-inventory-1.PNG&amp;diff=3622</id>
		<title>File:Product-category-to-create-inventory-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-category-to-create-inventory-1.PNG&amp;diff=3622"/>
		<updated>2024-10-30T06:37:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=ChangeLog&amp;diff=3621</id>
		<title>ChangeLog</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=ChangeLog&amp;diff=3621"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T10:51:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Change Log for Tactic version 10.0 compared to 8.0 =&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Param to show main menu logo in color &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add form to globally set &amp;quot;VARIANT_ALLOW_STOCK_MOVEMENT_ON_VARIANT_PARENT&amp;quot; variable &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add possibility to have different mail for autocopy for holiday &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Global_options|NEW: add option MAIN_GRANDTOTAL_LIST_SHOW to always show grand total to lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding mobile phone to thirdparty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accept the __NOW__ and __USER_ID__key into filters&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add possibility for specific format FEC to sort with the FEC name&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Expense report - Add an option to use end period for transfer&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Show accounting result on balance&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Show import key if exist&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to change all service dates at once&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a default limit in nb to agenda export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a link to add a website category in edit page properties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add ALT+s to save a website page in edit mode&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add Category filter for ActionComm&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add code+label of payment mode and term in purchase invoice export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column data payment on VAT list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add column for barcode in ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add column to store a label for a supplier price&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Website_Module|NEW: add constant TAKEPOS_ALTERNATIVE_PAYMENT_SCREEN]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add constant TICKETS_NO_COMPANY_ON_FORM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add constant VATUPDATE_NO_TRANSACTION&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Projects_Module|NEW: add const PROJECT_HIDE_OPEN_PROJECTS_LIST_ON_PROJECT_AREA to have the ability to hide the potentially very long list of open projects in any case]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add default User roles for Thirdparties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added a configuration in workflows&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added address, zip &amp;amp; town to resource object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add field Reply to in emailing&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add Filter on product referring object status(Order and Order Supplier)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add geometrics extrafield&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add global PRODUCT_STOCK_LIST_SHOW_WITH_COMPILED_PHYSICAL_STOCK for this is based on compiled physical stock, not the sum of product stocks on existing links.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add id of last page accessed in website&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add import ID in list of products&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding a recipient on emails sent, change status to sent partially.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add invoice subtype (some countries need this like greece)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Event_Organization#Exporting_an_ICS_File|NEW: Add link to export ICS file of an event.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option MAIN_USE_FULL_TEXT_INDEXATION&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option PDF_ADD_POSITION&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option position[&amp;#039;find&amp;#039;] to Tactic Editor &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option THIRDPARTY_MIN_NB_PROF_ID and THIRDPARTY_MAX_NB_PROF_ID&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option TICKET_INCLUDE_SUSPENDED_STATUS (Suspended status no more&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to open files in new tab &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add picto favicon&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add position column in category table  &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add position field into category add view&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add some bank info on odt&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adds payment terms and percent discount to the creation of an invoice from time entries in projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add state province filter field&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add support of [IF] tag other than in the core content (ex: headers who is in stylesXml)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add table to store product relation with thirdparty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow smileys into emailing html content&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow to set a default project for POS sales&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: animation for display spinner when waiting response&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Asset Module - make asset model creation in a single step&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: auto-determine piece number in FEC import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: auto fill infos in template email&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Automatically fill matching extra fields of object on line creation.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Salaries_Module#Adding_a_document|NEW: Can add documents on a payment.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Members_Module#Creation_of_Member_types|NEW: Can create new membership type from the create member form]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User_module#Exporting_user_related_security_events|NEW: Can export security events.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can force language of a page in website module with xx/pagename&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can force position of signature on PDF using a setup constant&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can generate the email selector file&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can setup phone mobile for the main company&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show legal form of company into the list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show the legal form in address of recipient in PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show the list of projects having at least one contact that is a contact of the third party&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Complete the thirdparty index page with last modified contacts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: constant MAIN_DISCARD_NEWD_PROJECTS_IN_SELECT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: contact type on auto add contributor&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: contenteditable is supported on table,header,footer and menu tags&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: cronjob: deny to launch a method from a deactivated module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: determine multi-currency price on object line create tpl&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Develop new quick edit opportunity status&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: display product and qty in stock_movement table in project overview&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tactic can now re-open ticket upon customer reply on the same ticket via email  &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Edit ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Expense Report: Add conf to block line creation if line date is out of range&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Expense Report: new line add conf to Block if line date out of range&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: export invoice source id&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: export order client code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: feature to merge 2 tasks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: fetch object by element for website account card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: filter on sale representative in contact list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Filter shipments by selecting multiple shipping methods&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Font param Look and Feel&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: functionality to delete contact of company list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: functionality to display codebar on pdf files&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: functionality to list event for user&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: functionality for salaries massaction (bank-transfer)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: function for removing company contacts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: get html template example for each model&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: hide external and non employee users in combobox&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: hide external user in combobox&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: in project overview, stock movement section, we only stock movement ref, but not the product and not the quantity&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: input reason label in customer proposal and order export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: intervention list date filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice Creditor Reference and banking barcode (FI)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice PDF If bank account is empty, not print &amp;quot;Bank&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Account&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: layout and prompt AI on create emailing&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Look and field: The operator &amp;#039;or&amp;#039; on category filter visible only&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: make &amp;quot;sell&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;eat by&amp;quot; mandatory in product lot&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Management of the In-Reply-To and References for ticket answers.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: module user rights enhancement&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Website: Can link/unlink translation between web pages&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Move dir of cache for widgets&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: multiselect with checkbox in categories/tags search for thirdparty list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new consts to redirect from massaction createbills&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new global string to preselect yes for one bill per thirparty in orderlist massaction &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: notification action triggers for cancelling orders and invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: now button when editing an event&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shipment_Module#Creation_of_shipment|NEW: online signature of shipments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option to transfer only reconciliated lines from bank&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Param to show main menu logo in color look and feel&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment page received from donations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: possibility to define a completely inactive module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: preview example page in website when create page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: propal canceled status&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: receptions in tactic search box&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: redirect link in the config module in the event of an error client&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: remove auto selected user for taxes-charges by default&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: resource address, phone, email &amp;amp; maxusers&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Script for fast identification of missing/unused/duplicate translations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: search member by date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: See the documents of my subordinates &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: separation of expense report from salary accounting code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show the profit per attendee on events&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: signed status CRUD to contract and fichinter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Simplify the verification of context in hook&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Sort variants list by product ref on combinations page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Statistic page donation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Invoice - List - Selector with choice on ECC country&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: supplier order submit method message&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Proposal API extended with DELETE, POST and PUT possibilities&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Take image from content for RSS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add buttons to allow keyboard usage for discounts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add constant to show line subprices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TAKEPOS - Clear search results&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TAkePOS - don&amp;#039;t allow payment if no thirdparty selected&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - Option TAKEPOS_NO_GENERIC_THIRDPARTY to disallow payment if no specific thirdparty selected (generic not allowed)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Test send triggercode to url&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Trigger for Knowledge&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add branches into apstats security report&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: updated resource list for new fields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Update expense report card.php to allow pdf preview even without thumbnail&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: update price with auto to use const for rounding prices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Use a nicer combo list to select the export accounting format&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: users can set their own length for short lists&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Various payment - Use list of account when edit&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: warning message when cloning a product whose status is not to sell&lt;br /&gt;
* PERF: Performance enhancement on Invoice/Payment area page&lt;br /&gt;
* PERF: Use cache for loaded users/contact on project list&lt;br /&gt;
* SEC: Add a protection against installation of external module bypassing&lt;br /&gt;
* SEC: A user with export permission can export module data without&lt;br /&gt;
* SEC: Reduce nb of var without WAF used when using the website module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Workstation (used to enhance the module BOM and Manufacturing Order) is now stable&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a CLI tool to regenerate all documents&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a confirmation popup when deleting extrafields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add type &amp;#039;icon&amp;#039; type for extrafields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Use ajax for state loading after country change&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add support for parent projects &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Expense report - Add two fields into export : Qty &amp;amp; Unit price (excl.) &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: date filter thirdparties contracts projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the Project filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support extrafields in selectForForms&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy: Add quick navigation with keyboard shortcut on ledger&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy: FEC/FEC2 format export with attachments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy: Option to choose length of lettering code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy: Chart of accounts ES PCG08-PYME-CAT in catalan language&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a button to create a product or a service from an order or an invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a goto url from smartphone search page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added all id prof checker on thirdparty for code compta customer and supplier&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a constant to check if qty shipped not greater than qty ordered&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added context for the movement stock (role toconsume/toproduce) on mrp&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added contract link on ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added column &amp;#039;Technical ID&amp;#039; in list of details lines of an order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added custom compute for exports&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added custom text on footer total&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added different picto for each type of extrafields (date, string, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a popup on validation instead of a database field to know if the user wants to include subwarehouse&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added VAT free &amp;amp; VAT amounts on payment input&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added ext payment system ID in the payment page with link to Stripe&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added field Technical ID in list of users&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added filter on status of line of a dictionary&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added get_substitutionarray_other() on shipping odt&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added IdProfCheck on thirdparty for BE&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added invoice subtype in customer invoice and template invoice &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a label to price level when changing price&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added modifications of template invoices into agenda&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added more company information (ProfId7 to 10)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added more information to holiday mailings&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added more param on fetch() to prepare perf optimization&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added more tables activated by module activation only&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added new field into $fields array + Creation of the function getChildWarehouse&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added option for cancel consumed and produced lines (delete lines and rollback stocks) when delete or cancel an manufacturing order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added option in PDF for purchase order and quotation to hide prices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added order supplier submit notif&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added parent product column on list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added picto in product/service list in object lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added possibility to choose separator&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added preselected update keys attribute to import class and select it by default if filled&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added recurring behaviour&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added recursive deletion option for child MOs &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added refactoring user permission&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added sorting of product price list by customer&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added tab Events/Agenda on recurring invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added the formEditObjectLine hook on commande card and invoice card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added the picto phone of thirdparty on the kanban view of projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added the status of partnership to select partnership for emailing&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added Ticket tab on contract&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Agenda: agenda per user use quarter hour split instead of half hour split&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow sync of currency rates with currency layer by default.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Assign contact to a ticket message&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Better protection against reserved words&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: billing on shipment+reception. Can be done before or after delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can edit bomline workstation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can include product variants in list of products&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can manage ODT documents for groups of users.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can restore product in stock when deleting the supplier invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can see the favicon file into setup of properties of a website&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can switch product batch management to no management.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can upload/delete ODT template for project and tasks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: clone skill object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: column in  table prelevement_lignes for fk_user&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: CONF allow modify ticket classification even if closed&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: conf to display date entry stock exped and sort in date order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Contract: Merge the &amp;quot;Create ...&amp;quot; buttons on contract into one.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: create a product from a free line in a document&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Date field for shipment export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Date format dayhoursec is using year on 2 char on smartphones&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: do not add default value in list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Donations: Generic doc template for donations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: drop down for action button show a simple button if only 1 action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Exports: added product barcode on stock exports&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: filter on from/to period rather than month/year&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: FontAwesome - added possibility to select another version&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Get list evaluation with skills details in user fiche&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR: PDF Generation for each Human Resource Evaluations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: improved resource data structure&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Interventions: close notification for interventions&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Inventory: include sub warehouse in inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Inventory: inventory without virtual products (kits)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoices: subtypes for customers and vendors&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoices: start and end date for due date filter on invoice list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice time from task, make task note better display in invoice line&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: lazy load to substitute project variables&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Library including math and financial functions&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Loan: can upload a file with drag and drop&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Manage rate indirect.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Manufacturing Order: add edit line on MO&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: memorize model name for PDF hooks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Menu editor is responsive&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: ModuleBuilder: Can modify the picto into ModuleBuilder&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: ModuleBuilder: Form for add object&amp;#039;s property on ModuleBuilder&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: More accurate tooltip on what admin permissions are&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new option for hide the footer &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new option for choose project visibility&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new option for hide the footer of tickets on the public interface&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: no need to create invoice supplier object on supplier card for standalone credit note&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Open-Surveys: Add a public page to list all open surveys&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option to show label, ref+label or only ref of product in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: payment full amount detail tooltip&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payments: Can edit both the Test and Live stripe customer account on payment&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: possibility to deselect line when create a recurring invoice + missing to use fk_parent_line&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Projects: List - use select2 multiselect for status&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Projects: massactions to delete projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Propagate invoice extrafields into template invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Retrieve VAT details from the Greek Ministry of Finance GSIS SOAP web service and autocomplete third party fields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Right for stats orders&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: rights and check access to create portal accounts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Row in list higher height&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Salaries: Can generate SEPA files for salaries&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Save date of RUM creation when creating a Stripe SEPA mandate&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Shipments: can include service (for information and invoicing)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show id of module on the tooltip module help page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show VAT free amount on payment input close&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Sub total in list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support html content for combo list of email recipient&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: add constant to check qty asked is available&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: add constant to choose contact instead of customer&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: amount label with or without tax in free product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: compatibility with lots and serials&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: use default customer, category and product when enable TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Website_Module|NEW: TakePOS: added option TAKEPOS_HIDE_PRODUCT_PRICES to hide prices in TakePOS]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: add and list external contributors on ticket public interface&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Third-Parties: add total line to third-parties list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tooltips are using ajax by default&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: Support of js into the Tactic server preview&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Top menu support picto of modules that are font awesome picto.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: updating by adding massactions for delete projects in societe tab&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: updating by adding tooltip for api section in Modulebuilder&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: updating for display Help title when try to delete Don&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Upgrade in module builder in menu section&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: use account address in sepa mandate&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: VAT rate - Add entity&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: Support of js into the Tactic server preview&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: When an user unset the batch management of products, transformation of each batch stock movement in global stock movement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Change Log for Tactic version 8.0 compared to 7.0 = &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Workstations Management upgraded to stable status.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Group social networks fields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add specific page to export accounting data rather than the journals page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add sub-account balance FPC22&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Manage customer retained warranty FPC21+&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Manage intra-community VAT on supplier invoices - FPC22&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - iSuiteExpert export model&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Quadratus export with attachments in accountancy export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Can filter on a custom group of accounts. Perf or ledger list.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Can select the export format during export of journals&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - sort of column of custom group of account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can upload a file with drag and drop on purchase invoice, vats, salaries and social contributions&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add bookmarks in selectable landing pages for users&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column ext_payment_site into societe_rib to allow multiple payment mode&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add conversion of images to webp for a single image in website media editor&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add CRC for currency symbol before amount&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add filter on nb of generation done in list of recurring invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add filters and sort on product unit column&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add link to edit VAT list from error message of missing VAT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add mass action delete on VAT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add possibility to choose format&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: An external module can modify the quick search fields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Bank:  Bank name no more mandatory on creation. Can be generated if empty.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Bank:  Add fields zip, town, country for owner of a bank account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: batch referential objects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can add the add now link on date into addfieldvalue&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can add an array of several links in date selector&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can bin accounting line for a given month&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit inline the VAT number from supplier tab&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can go back to draft on shipment when stock change not on validate&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can modify bank account of sepa payment (if file not sent yet)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set a checkbox in formconfirm by clicking on the label&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set the page &amp;quot;List of opportunities&amp;quot; as landing page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can stay on edit field when errors occurs&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: create email substitution variable for intervention signature URL&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Contacts: presend mass action in contact list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Customers: add date due and labels into customer comm card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Debug the custom CSS feature to avoid a directory search/scan at&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Disable bad reputation product price&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email: autofill email form with the email template with status &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; on&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email: don&amp;#039;t have closed contact proposed as receiver for the mails&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email: can set flag default value on email templates&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Collector: add field reply-to in email collector as possible filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Collector: substitute date now in email collector&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Collector: operation type in email collector to load or create contact&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Collector: easier setup - can also use ! for negative search&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Templates: show module into list of email templates&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Events: can add any contact on events if global MAIN_ACTIONCOM_CAN_ADD_ANY_CONTACT is set at 1&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Events: list with color&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Events: remove default percentage for event creation url&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: formconfirm can support field with format datetime&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GeoIP: Can test a geoip conversion from the geoip setup page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: add a CSS editor into the admin GUI&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: add dropdown button actions (example on Create button on project)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: color for start date and owner&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: new tab for reception and shipment&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: better design for the page of discounts of a thirdparty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: can set background style with MAIN_LOGIN_BACKGROUND_STYLE&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Help: Tooltip to explain how to add a photo on a product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: helper functions for dates + small demo case&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR - Salary: can fill date of salary payment with date of start of salary&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR - Salary: can modify the date of payment of a salary (if not reconciled)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR - Salary: date for salary payment includes the hour/min&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR - Salary: adding button Send Email on the salary file&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Import: filter on entity in import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Import: map table to element for get entity in import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Installation: Auto activate some modules on install (Export/Import/Wysiwyg editor)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice: show category of operations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice: add customer code to invoices listing&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Keep a link between user created from recruitment and application&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Mass Actions: Better responsive for mass actions&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: add numbering modules for members&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: add widget box_members_by_tags.php&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: Captcha for public member&amp;#039;s subscription form&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: migration script + delete old table + rename fields and indexes&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MRP MO: Dynamic choice of warehouse and batch in MO production.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Multicurrency REST API to create, update, delete, update rate...&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Multiselect for filter on prospection status&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: [Bulk delete Project tasks]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: No overwrite of optionals during put() contact&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Notifications: add Customer Order delivered (ORDER_NEW) in module Notification&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Notifications: for Sign or Refused Propal from Online Page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Now we can edit amount on VAT and salaries clone action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: only get opened contact from liste_contact function, to not have access to closed contact as mail receiver&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option: MAIN_SECURITY_MAXFILESIZE_DOWNLOADED&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option to manage deposit slips for more payment modes&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option to show column for field and line selection on the left&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Orders: add sub total in order list det&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Orders: list product in orders&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Orders export: allow to export field &amp;#039;shipment method&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: payment default values when supplier order created from reception&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment: manage contracts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment: sepaStripe now creates the payment mode with type pm_ using new API&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment: add partial payment reason &amp;quot;withholding tax&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment: Can edit account on miscellaneous payment (if not transferred)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: category of operation for crabe PDF model&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: Name and date to print on PDF Sign&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: Use the more recent PDF templates for documents by default on a fresh install&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: Option PDF_SHOW_PHONE_AFTER_USER_CONTACT to show phone after specific assigned contact on PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: Option PDF_SHOW_EMAIL_AFTER_USER_CONTACT to show email after specific assigned contact on PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: product images on popup are cached&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Products: Add origin info when create a product batch when created from a movement stock&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Products: Add statistics by amount on statistics of products.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals: filter for Signed+Billed in proposals&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals: can modify margin rates in offers like VAT rates&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals: option filter for NoSalesRepresentativeAffected in proposals list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals: constant PROPALE_ADDON_NOTE_PUBLIC_DEFAULT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Reception: can receive more than qty ordered on reception&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: referential objects of batch&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: remove keys whose table element is the same as element in map list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: repair script skip views&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: search on time spent duration range&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Security: Save date to invalidate other session into user table&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Security: Invalidate all sessions of a user when password is modified.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Service Contracts: Filter on amount and qty on list of service&amp;#039;s contracts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: set today start time at beginning&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show main currency in company info user tooltip&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show supplier invoice ref of direct debit transfer tab invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Social Networks: expend/collapse list of social networks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stock limit for alert and desired optimal stock by product and warehouse import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stock: Add warehouse create and modify triggers.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product_Module#Adding_a_default_warehouse|NEW: Stock: Can select several warehouses into the view stock at date in past]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stripe: add STRIPE_DEBUG, a way to log Stripe IPN&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Invoices: add ability of ODT support to supplier invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Order:  show supplier name in getNomUrl of supplier order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Order:  set payment default values when supplier order created from reception&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Price:  Add a status on supplier price ref (WIP to close a supplier ref)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support different bank account for several direct debit payments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support multiselect in the warehouse selection combo box&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Poll,_Survey_or_Vote_Module#Adding_a_comment_to_a_poll|NEW: Survey: Comment on survey is possible only after vote.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: adapt category and product pictures sizes on TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: limit load products in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The batch for remind on due date can be setup for using validation date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The refresh link for IMAP collector is always visible&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tickets_Module#Notification_on_a_ticket_creation|NEW: Tickets: Send a notification email when ticket assigned]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: set ticket status to answered if the client has answered from the public interface&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: added an option to display the progress of tickets on the public interface&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: add link to thirdparty tickets history&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: notify also the contributor affected to a ticket if a new message public is post (add global TICKET_PUBLIC_NOTIFICATION_NEW_MESSAGE_ALSO_CONTRIBUTOR)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Upgrades: The upgrade process can be done by creating a file upgrade.unlock&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Use a cache file for external RSS in calendar&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Use by default the domain $tactic_main_url_root for SMTP HELO&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User_module#Public_Virtual_Cards|NEW: Users: add a public virtual card page for each user]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: VAT can be modified during add of line&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website Module: Increment website counter on each page access in website module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website Module: Show counter of access of website in website list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Widgets: Show picto into the combobox of widgets&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Widgets: Implement MAIN_ACTIVATE_FILECACHE on birthday widget&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Widgets: Add widget &amp;quot;The next upcoming events&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Widgets: Add widget of open opportunities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Change Log for Tactic version 7.0 compared to 6.0 =&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Global_options|NEW: can move the checkbox column on left (experimental option MAIN_CHECKBOX_LEFT_COLUMN)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added columns &amp;#039;alias_name&amp;#039; on project, supplier invoice, supplier order, supplier proposals and task list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added option for dark theme mode in display - color and theme&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added option to auto define barcode numbers for third-parties in barcode module setup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add bank account number used on invoices for debit&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added notes to productlot module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Bank - Add salaries &amp;amp; vat in the tab of planned entries of a bank account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: member module set up made easier&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: projects and thirdparties can be viewed as conversation (&amp;quot;Message&amp;quot; view), like events/agenda.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can now set user supervisors using mass action in htdocs/user&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can chose if VAT ID is unique or not for third parties&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Partnership_management_Module#Creating_a_new_partnership|NEW: all partnerships displayed on tab partnership of a thirdparty and member]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: massaction for updating product prices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Massaction to assign users on projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: adding js to hide/show advanced option on the export data page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add a graphic option to enable lettering function - FPC21&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add a way to clean some words when you generate thirdparty accounting account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Added an option during export to export or not the lettering FPC21&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Manage supplier deposit with specific account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Model Digitaria - Add a way to clean some words when you generate thirdparty accounting account FPC22&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a button &amp;quot;Test collect&amp;quot; in email collector&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a constant to disallow modification of the product reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a method doAutoRenewContracts that can be used as a cron task.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add &amp;quot; as enclosure by default for CSV export. Keep removing CR/LF.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add attached file in presend email form of thirdparty card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a way to enter LICENSE file content in property of website&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add badge in admin extrafields setup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add constant PROPAL_BYPASS_VALIDATED_STATUS&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Event_Organization#Add_date_and_location|NEW: Add date event and location on event organization]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User_module#Creation_of_a_new_user|NEW: Add employment anniversary in birthday box]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add extrafield type &amp;quot;IP&amp;quot; to store IP addresses&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add fail2ban rules examples to limit access to /public pages&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add filter &amp;quot;Product subject to lot/Serial&amp;quot; in stock per lot/serial&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add hidden option MAIN_EMAIL_SUPPORT_ACK to restore Email ack checkbox&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add IMAP port setting on email collector module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding JAPAN Chart-of-Account and regions/departments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding NIF verification for Algeria&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add link to create an element from the category page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add margin infos to takepos invoice lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add max size send for &amp;quot;backup and link to mail&amp;quot; option&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add more advices into the Setup security page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add new global variable for keeping the previous signature information on proposal (case of reopening a proposal)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add objectLink on shipment&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option &amp;quot;Show price on the generated documents for receptions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add picto property on sub-module for password generation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add redirect on action confirm addconsumedline and addproduceline&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a new advanced permission &amp;quot;read price&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add substitution key __SENDEREMAIL_SIGNATURE__&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the referrer-policy to &amp;quot;same-origin&amp;quot; by default on all public pages.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the SMTP header References on ticket email created by email&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the thirdparty column to the time list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add trigger to record the event of sending an email from a project&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow download link option in module configuration (propal,invoice,supplier proposal, order)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Bulk action to remove a category in list/search website pages&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can copy/paste images into emails sent.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit label of an emailing even once sent&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit property css, cssview, csslist on extrafields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can enter the unit price including the vat when adding new product lines on invoices, orders, proposals, ...&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can invoice task time per different services&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can join several files by default on email form&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can send an email on scheduled job error&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set a commercial discount by entering amount including VAT&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Scheduled_jobs_Module#Setting_up_Monthly_Frequency|NEW: Can set a monthly frequency (or multiple) in cron tasks.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set start and end dates and comment on button &amp;quot;Activate all services&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can sort on preselected best supplier price&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product_Module#Adding_stocks_and_inventory|NEW: Can use products categories to make inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Change filter type on tickets list into a multiselect combo&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: conf TIMESPENT_ALWAYS_UPDATE_THM, when it&amp;#039;s on we always check current thm of user to update it in task time line&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: constant PROPAL_NEW_AS_SIGNED&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show date delivery planned on orders linked to company and product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Default doc template of contracts is not mandatory&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Default values in extrafields are no more limited to 255 char.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Point_Of_Sale#Other_Information|NEW: display currency in takepos menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Intervention_Module#Adding_online_signature|NEW: Enable online signature for interventions]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: extrafield price with currency&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: filter on reception dates (from / to) in cheque payment    card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: default_lang for members&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: Table of membership types&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: add free membership amounts at the membership type level&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: Header Scroll in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: add price to product box in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: add setup parameters, can setup terminal name&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: support of Stripe Terminal with TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: Receipt preview in TakePOS setup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: different product list on smartphone&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: can delete a whole website if disabled&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: can remove a website template&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: can set header &amp;quot;Strict-Transport-Security&amp;quot; in web sites.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: can switch status of website and page from the website toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: Templates of websites are now directories and not zip into core repo&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: add 4 other templates in website module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: Add counters for public access of pages on a website&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice - Add french mention on pdf when vat debit option is on&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: invoice export : add accounting affectation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: label on products categories filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The link &amp;quot;add to bookmark&amp;quot; is always on top in the bookmark popup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MAIN_SEARCH_CATEGORY_PRODUCT_ON_LISTS const to show category customer filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Make module WebservicesClient deprecated. Use module WebHook instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: manage no email with thirdparties (better for GDPR)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Manage Position (Rank) on Contract Lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Manage VAT on all lines on purchases cycle&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Page to show virtual stock at a future date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: On a bank reconciled line, we can modify the bank receipt&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: On a form to send an email, we show all emails of all contacts of object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option PRODUCTBATCH_SHOW_WAREHOUSE_ON_SHIPMENT showing wh on PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option PRODUIT_DESC_IN_FORM accept (desktop only or +smartphone)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Page for mass stock transfer can be used with no source stock&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: parent company column and filter in invoice and order list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add &amp;quot;Show Sales rep&amp;quot; option for PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Picto for shared link is clickable&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: possibility to select scopes with checkbox for Oauth tokens&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: private and public note on user, thirdparty and contact list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: product categories filter on inventory list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Product supplier price: autofill default supplier VAT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Project - author field become an available column on lists&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Reception - Add a from/to on search on date field&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Start a simple support of recurrent events on agenda&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Resize parent company column in order list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Save one click to select on delivery ack, on emails.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: scheduled job to send unpaid invoice reminder can now use the cc and bcc from email template&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: set thirdparty type with company modify trigger&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show also scheduled task never finished in scheduled task widget&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show badge with number of extrafields in setup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show category tree in sellist and chkbxlst for common object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show picto and color into combo for selection of tags&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show product label on inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show sell-by and eat-by dates only if not empty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show SellBy/EatBy dates for each batch product in shipment card&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Proposals_Module|NEW: Can skip accept/refuse steps for proposals (option PROPAL_SKIP_ACCEPT_REFUSE)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: experimental SMTP using PhpImap allowing OAuth2 authentication (need to add option MAIN_IMAP_USE_PHPIMAP)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can substitute project title in mail template&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier order list - Add column private and public note&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Update ActionComm type_code on email message ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: VAT - Admin - Add information on deadline day for submission of VAT declaration&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expand/collapse permissions on user permission page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show delivery mode on PDF for proposals&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the target to select attendees of event for emailings&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set background style with MAIN_LOGIN_BACKGROUND_STYLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Change Log for Tactic version 6.0 compared to 5.0 =&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support for recurring purchase invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Include German public holidays&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show ZATCA QR-Code on PDFs&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show Swiss QR-Code on PDFs&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added ExtraFields for Stock Mouvement&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new massaction to assign a sale representatives on a selection of thirdparties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: edit discount pourcentage for all lines in one shot&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accept &amp;#039;auto&amp;#039; for ref of object on import of purchase order/proposal&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add more filters and info on page to bind accounting accounts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add subledger account when generate a transaction with a deposit invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add a massaction to preselect an account (customer and supplier list)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add hidden feature for accounting reconciliation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: ACE Editor is restored at same cursor position after a save.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add &amp;quot;addMoreActionsButtons&amp;quot; hook to subscription form&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add an option in GUI to show a Quick add button into top menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a workflow to auto link contract on a ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column date of Signature on proposal list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column template invoice in invoice list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column &amp;quot;Total HT&amp;quot; to products array on document creation card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add configuration for text color of button action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add entity filter in exports&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show the event block on recurring invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add firstname, lastname and max number of attendees for module &amp;quot;Event Organization&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add margin info in proposal and order list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add massaction &amp;quot;Edit Extrafield&amp;quot; for Product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add more fields to detect duplicate during import of thirdparties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to foce delivery on email for purchase order receipt to yes&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add possibility to create contract from invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Global_options|NEW: Add possibility with constant MAIN_LOGIN_BADCHARUNAUTHORIZED to define bad character unauthorized into login name]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add private and public notes on tax files.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add substitutions &amp;quot;user numbers&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: allow a ticket to be automatically marked as read when created from backend.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: allow cut&amp;amp;paste as real numeric value to excel&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: A public form to send a message and create a lead is available&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: automatically set totally received status in reception&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Auto set invoice paid when adding credit not and remain to pay is 0&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can enter price with tax for predefined products on purchase objects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can filter on a thirdparty on product statistics&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can removed doc templates from setup page of thirdparty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: clean values and amount in FEC import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: constant MAIL_MASS_ACTION_ADD_LAST_IF_MAIN_DOC_NOT_FOUND for mailing mass action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Contact filter project list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Create contract from invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Default value for MAIN_SECURITY_CSRF_WITH_TOKEN is now 2 &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: deposit payment terms: add field into dictionary admin page to define default percentage of deposit.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Dictionaries - add possibility to manage countries in EEC&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Dictionaries - Availability dictionary has a new column unit and number&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Display errors in a message box after generating documents&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Enhance the import. Can use &amp;#039;auto&amp;#039; for the ref (import of orders)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Events on Proposal to Return to Draft&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Page to list expense report payments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: JS inventory autocalc input&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: language support for more emailing target selectors&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: leave requests: add field into type dictionary to block request if balance is negative&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Mass action &amp;quot;Close shipments&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module BOM - add tabs for nets Bom&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module BOM - add the possibility to add sub-BOMs to BOM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Recruitment - Add a public page with list of all open job positions.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Recruitment - Add a tab with list of application on the jobposition file.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to move checkbox column as first column on Thirdparty list (only few screens)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: payment conditions enabling semi-automatic deposit creation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: possibility to consume multiple batch&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Reverse movement product consumption&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Send email to the supplier order contact&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add permission to report time on timesheet&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Knowledge Management - add status &amp;quot;Obsolete&amp;quot; to KM articles&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MRP - split consumption line on MO&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MRP - display physical and virtual stock of the products when creating OF from a BOM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MRP - display product ref in &amp;quot;Object link&amp;quot; product tab for BOM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Projects - add filter &amp;quot;opportunity status&amp;quot; on statistics of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals - option update prices on proposal cloning&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: SEPA XML - option to place payment Type Info at Credit transfer Transaction level&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stocks - stock filter in reassort lists&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stocks - stock limit in stock export CSV&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stocks - Inventory - can change value of AWP during the inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier order - Show ref supplier of reception in linked object block&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: support user_modif in order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Surveys - Show number of votes into the label of tab &amp;quot;Results&amp;quot; of a survey&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - barcode rule to insert product in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - pagination on search results&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - show product reference&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add constant to hide categories&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add constant to show category description&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add constant to show only the products in stock&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Themes - add param color button action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Themes - Change in theme colors does not need to use the refresh button&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Themes - more mode for THEME_TOPMENU_DISABLE_IMAGE (2, 3, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Themes - MD - add param border table for md theme&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Third-Parties - Add rules &amp;quot;customer accountancy code&amp;quot; is mandatory to validate invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Third-Parties - Can set the parent company during the creation of thirdparty (action=add of societe/card.php)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets - create Third-party with contact if not found on public ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets - option to default check &amp;quot;notify tier at creation&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets - Trigger: allow to automatically send messages on new tickets&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets - optional display warning icons on ticket list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Websites Module - supports now the multicompany module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Websites Module - on redirect of page in website module, GET parameters are kept.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The backup tools has an &amp;quot;lowmemory&amp;quot; option for mysqldump on large database&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: thumbnail field in product list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: total mark rate in list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: uncheck &amp;quot;send message&amp;quot; by default on a ticket when private messages has been checked&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: VAT Report by month - Show detail by rate and also by code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added MMK currency (Myanmar Kyat)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: On a form to send an email, we show all emails of contacts of object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Partnership Management&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Event Organization Management&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Change Log Tactic version 5.0 =&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quotations_module#Online_signature|NEW: Online proposal signature]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can define some max limit on expense report (per period, per type or expense, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Provide a special pages for bookmarks and multicompany for a better use of some mobile applications&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow the use of NEWREF to get for example the new reference a draft order will get after validation.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to disable globaly some notifications emails.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add NEWREF subtitute to get new object reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add URL_SHIPMENT substitute to get the URL of a shipment&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: REST API module: add api key generate / modify permission.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Make &amp;quot;L&amp;#039;Annuaire des Entreprises&amp;quot; the default provider for SIREN verification for French thirdparties.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add tags on ticket/categories&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Workflow: Close order on shipment closing.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can enter the buying price (for Weighted Average Price update) on lines during the reception step&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add legal form for Sweden&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add product account in import/export of thirdparty (level 3)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Format FEC/FEC2 - Add column NumFacture&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add auto creation of agenda event on supplier_order cancellation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a PDF document template for Manufacturing Orders&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add budget field into task &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add cancel button to classify reception form on supplier_orders&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added address field into contacts list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added documents page and send mail possibility in payments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add edit option in propal&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added linked files page and send mail possibility in payments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add field date from/to in customer and supplier payment list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add filter from date to date into action/evt list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add import / export of MO and BOMLines - Close &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding accounting export model for iSuite Expert&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add link to an element by ref&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add MRP into Object Linked Box&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to hide customer code on PDF documents&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add sale representative in order and invoice list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add a setting to create PDF in PDF/A - 1b format &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add SOCIETE_SHOW_VAT_IN_LIST to display VAT number in combo list of thirdparties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add sortorder on units list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adds PDF_HIDE_PRODUCT_LABEL_IN_SUPPLIER_LINES to hide product label in supplier order lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add STOCK_MOVEMENT_LIST_HIDE_UNIT_PRICE to hide unit price on some pages&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add support for zstd compression&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow drag and drop on kits&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow exporting supplier order validation date + validation user&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allows product ref generation after the form is validated with PRODUCT_GENERATE_REF_AFTER_FORM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: autocomplete account group when editing an account card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Auto create invoice for payment done on an order with online payment link of order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit fields of proposal when proposal is not yet signed&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit the translation key of an overwrote translation key.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can enable/disable external calendar by default&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can hide sender name on PDF documents&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can select lot from a combo list of existing batch numbers (in MRP consumtion)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set the default BOM on a product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set/unset the usual working day of the week (friday, saturday, sunday)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show progression of task into combo list of tasks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can upload the odt file for the product doc template&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Contract - Add From/to input on search date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Customer Display with TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Split Sale in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Customer invoice template list - Add input date from/to&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: date filter on project list and task list From-&amp;gt;To&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: display shipping method and tracking url on shipment list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: conf to force amounts to be entered only including taxes&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: conf to pre-fill start/end dates with bounds of current month&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: show link to already existing overlapping expense report&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: can make project field mandatory on lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Expose bank account holder, label and number &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: field and behavior in product object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: generate intervention from time spent&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: holiday: handle monthly balance updates with cronjob&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HRM integration, source code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HRM admin - Add tabs&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HRM - Include more options to manage/custom dashboard&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Increase size of params of actions for emailcollector&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice list - Use complete country select field with EEC or not&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: mass action delete, no more break if at least one object has child&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: mass action paid on customer invoice list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: massaction validate on supplier orders list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Mass action send email to all attendees of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: conf to pre-fill start/end dates with bounds of current month&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option &amp;quot;Add a link on the PDF to make the online payment&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: More options to generate PDF (show Frame option, width of picture option)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Preview of pdf files of expense report lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: print without details&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: project time spent: conf to prevent recording time after X months&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: rewrite bind accountancy code finding on customer and sales invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Societe - Add perentity functionality on customer/supplier accountancy auxiliary account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Survey - Add a clickable link in email send&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Social Contributions - Add from/to filter on list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier order and proposal - Add From/to input on search date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Task - Add From/to input on search date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add theme option THEME_ELDY_USEBORDERONTABLE&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The Anti-CSRF protection MAIN_SECURITY_CSRF_WITH_TOKEN is on to value 1 by default&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: when multiple order linked to facture, show list into note.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: when we delete several objects with massaction, if somes object has child we must see which objects are concerned and nevertheless delete objects which can be deleted&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Editing a page in website module keep old page with name .back&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: External backups can be downloaded from the &amp;quot;About info page&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add massaction to switch status on sale / on purchase of a product.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stable module Knowledge Management&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Experimental module Event Organization Management&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Experimental module Workstations Management&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Development of module Partnership Management&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=ChangeLog&amp;diff=3620</id>
		<title>ChangeLog</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=ChangeLog&amp;diff=3620"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T10:50:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* ChangeLog for Tactic version 10.0 compared to 8.0 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Change Log for Tactic version 10.0 compared to 8.0 =&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Param to show main menu logo in color &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add form to globally set &amp;quot;VARIANT_ALLOW_STOCK_MOVEMENT_ON_VARIANT_PARENT&amp;quot; variable &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add possibility to have different mail for autocopy for holiday &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Global_options|NEW: add option MAIN_GRANDTOTAL_LIST_SHOW to always show grand total to lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding mobile phone to thirdparty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accept the __NOW__ and __USER_ID__key into filters&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add possibility for specific format FEC to sort with the FEC name&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Expense report - Add an option to use end period for transfer&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Show accounting result on balance&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Show import key if exist&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to change all service dates at once&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a default limit in nb to agenda export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a link to add a website category in edit page properties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add ALT+s to save a website page in edit mode&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add Category filter for ActionComm&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add code+label of payment mode and term in purchase invoice export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column data payment on VAT list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add column for barcode in ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add column to store a label for a supplier price&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Website_Module|NEW: add constant TAKEPOS_ALTERNATIVE_PAYMENT_SCREEN]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add constant TICKETS_NO_COMPANY_ON_FORM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add constant VATUPDATE_NO_TRANSACTION&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Projects_Module|NEW: add const PROJECT_HIDE_OPEN_PROJECTS_LIST_ON_PROJECT_AREA to have the ability to hide the potentially very long list of open projects in any case]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add default User roles for Thirdparties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added a configuration in workflows&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added address, zip &amp;amp; town to resource object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add field Reply to in emailing&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add Filter on product referring object status(Order and Order Supplier)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add geometrics extrafield&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add global PRODUCT_STOCK_LIST_SHOW_WITH_COMPILED_PHYSICAL_STOCK for this is based on compiled physical stock, not the sum of product stocks on existing links.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add id of last page accessed in website&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add import ID in list of products&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding a recipient on emails sent, change status to sent partially.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add invoice subtype (some countries need this like greece)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Event_Organization#Exporting_an_ICS_File|NEW: Add link to export ICS file of an event.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option MAIN_USE_FULL_TEXT_INDEXATION&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option PDF_ADD_POSITION&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option position[&amp;#039;find&amp;#039;] to Tactic Editor &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option THIRDPARTY_MIN_NB_PROF_ID and THIRDPARTY_MAX_NB_PROF_ID&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option TICKET_INCLUDE_SUSPENDED_STATUS (Suspended status no more&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to open files in new tab &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add picto favicon&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add position column in category table  &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add position field into category add view&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add some bank info on odt&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adds payment terms and percent discount to the creation of an invoice from time entries in projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add state province filter field&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add support of [IF] tag other than in the core content (ex: headers who is in stylesXml)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add table to store product relation with thirdparty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow smileys into emailing html content&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow to set a default project for POS sales&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: animation for display spinner when waiting response&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Asset Module - make asset model creation in a single step&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: auto-determine piece number in FEC import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: auto fill infos in template email&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Automatically fill matching extra fields of object on line creation.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Salaries_Module#Adding_a_document|NEW: Can add documents on a payment.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Members_Module#Creation_of_Member_types|NEW: Can create new membership type from the create member form]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User_module#Exporting_user_related_security_events|NEW: Can export security events.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can force language of a page in website module with xx/pagename&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can force position of signature on PDF using a setup constant&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can generate the email selector file&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can setup phone mobile for the main company&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show legal form of company into the list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show the legal form in address of recipient in PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show the list of projects having at least one contact that is a contact of the third party&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Complete the thirdparty index page with last modified contacts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: constant MAIN_DISCARD_NEWD_PROJECTS_IN_SELECT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: contact type on auto add contributor&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: contenteditable is supported on table,header,footer and menu tags&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: cronjob: deny to launch a method from a deactivated module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: determine multi-currency price on object line create tpl&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Develop new quick edit opportunity status&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: display product and qty in stock_movement table in project overview&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tactic can now re-open ticket upon customer reply on the same ticket via email  &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Edit ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Expense Report: Add conf to block line creation if line date is out of range&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Expense Report: new line add conf to Block if line date out of range&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: export invoice source id&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: export order client code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: feature to merge 2 tasks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: fetch object by element for website account card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: filter on sale representative in contact list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Filter shipments by selecting multiple shipping methods&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Font param Look and Feel&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: functionality to delete contact of company list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: functionality to display codebar on pdf files&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: functionality to list event for user&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: functionality for salaries massaction (bank-transfer)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: function for removing company contacts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: get html template example for each model&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: hide external and non employee users in combobox&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: hide external user in combobox&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: in project overview, stock movement section, we only stock movement ref, but not the product and not the quantity&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: input reason label in customer proposal and order export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: intervention list date filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice Creditor Reference and banking barcode (FI)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice PDF If bank account is empty, not print &amp;quot;Bank&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Account&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: layout and prompt AI on create emailing&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Look and field: The operator &amp;#039;or&amp;#039; on category filter visible only&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: make &amp;quot;sell&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;eat by&amp;quot; mandatory in product lot&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Management of the In-Reply-To and References for ticket answers.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: module user rights enhancement&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Website: Can link/unlink translation between web pages&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Move dir of cache for widgets&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: multiselect with checkbox in categories/tags search for thirdparty list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new consts to redirect from massaction createbills&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new global string to preselect yes for one bill per thirparty in orderlist massaction &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: notification action triggers for cancelling orders and invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: now button when editing an event&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shipment_Module#Creation_of_shipment|NEW: online signature of shipments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option to transfer only reconciliated lines from bank&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Param to show main menu logo in color look and feel&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment page received from donations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: possibility to define a completely inactive module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: preview example page in website when create page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: propal canceled status&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: receptions in tactic search box&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: redirect link in the config module in the event of an error client&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: remove auto selected user for taxes-charges by default&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: resource address, phone, email &amp;amp; maxusers&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Script for fast identification of missing/unused/duplicate translations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: search member by date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: See the documents of my subordinates &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: separation of expense report from salary accounting code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show the profit per attendee on events&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: signed status CRUD to contract and fichinter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Simplify the verification of context in hook&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Sort variants list by product ref on combinations page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Statistic page donation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Invoice - List - Selector with choice on ECC country&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: supplier order submit method message&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Proposal API extended with DELETE, POST and PUT possibilities&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Take image from content for RSS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add buttons to allow keyboard usage for discounts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add constant to show line subprices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TAKEPOS - Clear search results&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TAkePOS - don&amp;#039;t allow payment if no thirdparty selected&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - Option TAKEPOS_NO_GENERIC_THIRDPARTY to disallow payment if no specific thirdparty selected (generic not allowed)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Test send triggercode to url&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Trigger for Knowledge&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add branches into apstats security report&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: updated resource list for new fields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Update expense report card.php to allow pdf preview even without thumbnail&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: update price with auto to use const for rounding prices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Use a nicer combo list to select the export accounting format&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: users can set their own length for short lists&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Various payment - Use list of account when edit&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: warning message when cloning a product whose status is not to sell&lt;br /&gt;
* PERF: Performance enhancement on Invoice/Payment area page&lt;br /&gt;
* PERF: Use cache for loaded users/contact on project list&lt;br /&gt;
* SEC: Add a protection against installation of external module bypassing&lt;br /&gt;
* SEC: A user with export permission can export module data without&lt;br /&gt;
* SEC: Reduce nb of var without WAF used when using the website module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Workstation (used to enhance the module BOM and Manufacturing Order) is now stable&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a CLI tool to regenerate all documents&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a confirmation popup when deleting extrafields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add type &amp;#039;icon&amp;#039; type for extrafields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Use ajax for state loading after country change&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add support for parent projects &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Expense report - Add two fields into export : Qty &amp;amp; Unit price (excl.) &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: date filter thirdparties contracts projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the Project filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support extrafields in selectForForms&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy: Add quick navigation with keyboard shortcut on ledger&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy: FEC/FEC2 format export with attachments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy: Option to choose length of lettering code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy: Chart of accounts ES PCG08-PYME-CAT in catalan language&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a button to create a product or a service from an order or an invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a goto url from smartphone search page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added all id prof checker on thirdparty for code compta customer and supplier&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a constant to check if qty shipped not greater than qty ordered&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added context for the movement stock (role toconsume/toproduce) on mrp&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added contract link on ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added column &amp;#039;Technical ID&amp;#039; in list of details lines of an order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added custom compute for exports&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added custom text on footer total&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added different picto for each type of extrafields (date, string, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a popup on validation instead of a database field to know if the user wants to include subwarehouse&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added VAT free &amp;amp; VAT amounts on payment input&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added ext payment system ID in the payment page with link to Stripe&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added field Technical ID in list of users&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added filter on status of line of a dictionary&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added get_substitutionarray_other() on shipping odt&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added IdProfCheck on thirdparty for BE&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added invoice subtype in customer invoice and template invoice &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added a label to price level when changing price&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added modifications of template invoices into agenda&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added more company information (ProfId7 to 10)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added more information to holiday mailings&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added more param on fetch() to prepare perf optimization&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added more tables activated by module activation only&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added new field into $fields array + Creation of the function getChildWarehouse&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added option for cancel consumed and produced lines (delete lines and rollback stocks) when delete or cancel an manufacturing order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added option in PDF for purchase order and quotation to hide prices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added order supplier submit notif&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added parent product column on list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added picto in product/service list in object lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added possibility to choose separator&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added preselected update keys attribute to import class and select it by default if filled&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added recurring behaviour&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added recursive deletion option for child MOs &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added refactoring user permission&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added sorting of product price list by customer&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added tab Events/Agenda on recurring invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added the formEditObjectLine hook on commande card and invoice card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added the picto phone of thirdparty on the kanban view of projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added the status of partnership to select partnership for emailing&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added Ticket tab on contract&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Agenda: agenda per user use quarter hour split instead of half hour split&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow sync of currency rates with currency layer by default.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Assign contact to a ticket message&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Better protection against reserved words&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: billing on shipment+reception. Can be done before or after delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can edit bomline workstation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can include product variants in list of products&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can manage ODT documents for groups of users.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can restore product in stock when deleting the supplier invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can see the favicon file into setup of properties of a website&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can switch product batch management to no management.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can upload/delete ODT template for project and tasks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: clone skill object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: column in  table prelevement_lignes for fk_user&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: CONF allow modify ticket classification even if closed&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: conf to display date entry stock exped and sort in date order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Contract: Merge the &amp;quot;Create ...&amp;quot; buttons on contract into one.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: create a product from a free line in a document&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Date field for shipment export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Date format dayhoursec is using year on 2 char on smartphones&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: do not add default value in list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Donations: Generic doc template for donations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: drop down for action button show a simple button if only 1 action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Exports: added product barcode on stock exports&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: filter on from/to period rather than month/year&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: FontAwesome - added possibility to select another version&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Get list evaluation with skills details in user fiche&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR: PDF Generation for each Human Resource Evaluations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: improved resource data structure&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Interventions: close notification for interventions&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Inventory: include sub warehouse in inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Inventory: inventory without virtual products (kits)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoices: subtypes for customers and vendors&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoices: start and end date for due date filter on invoice list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice time from task, make task note better display in invoice line&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: lazy load to substitute project variables&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Library including math and financial functions&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Loan: can upload a file with drag and drop&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Manage rate indirect.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Manufacturing Order: add edit line on MO&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: memorize model name for PDF hooks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Menu editor is responsive&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: ModuleBuilder: Can modify the picto into ModuleBuilder&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: ModuleBuilder: Form for add object&amp;#039;s property on ModuleBuilder&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: More accurate tooltip on what admin permissions are&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new option for hide the footer &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new option for choose project visibility&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new option for hide the footer of tickets on the public interface&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: no need to create invoice supplier object on supplier card for standalone credit note&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Open-Surveys: Add a public page to list all open surveys&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option to show label, ref+label or only ref of product in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: payment full amount detail tooltip&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payments: Can edit both the Test and Live stripe customer account on payment&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: possibility to deselect line when create a recurring invoice + missing to use fk_parent_line&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Projects: List - use select2 multiselect for status&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Projects: massactions to delete projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Propagate invoice extrafields into template invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Retrieve VAT details from the Greek Ministry of Finance GSIS SOAP web service and autocomplete third party fields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Right for stats orders&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: rights and check access to create portal accounts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Row in list higher height&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Salaries: Can generate SEPA files for salaries&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Save date of RUM creation when creating a Stripe SEPA mandate&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Shipments: can include service (for information and invoicing)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show id of module on the tooltip module help page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show VAT free amount on payment input close&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Sub total in list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support html content for combo list of email recipient&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: add constant to check qty asked is available&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: add constant to choose contact instead of customer&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: amount label with or without tax in free product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: compatibility with lots and serials&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: use default customer, category and product when enable TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Website_Module|NEW: TakePOS: added option TAKEPOS_HIDE_PRODUCT_PRICES to hide prices in TakePOS]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: add and list external contributors on ticket public interface&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Third-Parties: add total line to third-parties list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tooltips are using ajax by default&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: Support of js into the Tactic server preview&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Top menu support picto of modules that are font awesome picto.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: updating by adding massactions for delete projects in societe tab&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: updating by adding tooltip for api section in Modulebuilder&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: updating for display Help title when try to delete Don&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Upgrade in module builder in menu section&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: use account address in sepa mandate&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: VAT rate - Add entity&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: Support of js into the Tactic server preview&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: When an user unset the batch management of products, transformation of each batch stock movement in global stock movement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= ChangeLog for Tactic version 8.0 compared to 7.0 = &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Workstations Management upgraded to stable status.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Group social networks fields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add specific page to export accounting data rather than the journals page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add sub-account balance FPC22&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Manage customer retained warranty FPC21+&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Manage intra-community VAT on supplier invoices - FPC22&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - iSuiteExpert export model&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Quadratus export with attachments in accountancy export&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Can filter on a custom group of accounts. Perf or ledger list.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Can select the export format during export of journals&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - sort of column of custom group of account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can upload a file with drag and drop on purchase invoice, vats, salaries and social contributions&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add bookmarks in selectable landing pages for users&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column ext_payment_site into societe_rib to allow multiple payment mode&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add conversion of images to webp for a single image in website media editor&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add CRC for currency symbol before amount&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add filter on nb of generation done in list of recurring invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add filters and sort on product unit column&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add link to edit VAT list from error message of missing VAT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add mass action delete on VAT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add possibility to choose format&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: An external module can modify the quick search fields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Bank:  Bank name no more mandatory on creation. Can be generated if empty.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Bank:  Add fields zip, town, country for owner of a bank account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: batch referential objects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can add the add now link on date into addfieldvalue&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can add an array of several links in date selector&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can bin accounting line for a given month&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit inline the VAT number from supplier tab&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can go back to draft on shipment when stock change not on validate&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can modify bank account of sepa payment (if file not sent yet)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set a checkbox in formconfirm by clicking on the label&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set the page &amp;quot;List of opportunities&amp;quot; as landing page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can stay on edit field when errors occurs&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: create email substitution variable for intervention signature URL&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Contacts: presend mass action in contact list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Customers: add date due and labels into customer comm card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Debug the custom CSS feature to avoid a directory search/scan at&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Disable bad reputation product price&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email: autofill email form with the email template with status &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; on&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email: don&amp;#039;t have closed contact proposed as receiver for the mails&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email: can set flag default value on email templates&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Collector: add field reply-to in email collector as possible filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Collector: substitute date now in email collector&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Collector: operation type in email collector to load or create contact&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Collector: easier setup - can also use ! for negative search&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Email-Templates: show module into list of email templates&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Events: can add any contact on events if global MAIN_ACTIONCOM_CAN_ADD_ANY_CONTACT is set at 1&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Events: list with color&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Events: remove default percentage for event creation url&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: formconfirm can support field with format datetime&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GeoIP: Can test a geoip conversion from the geoip setup page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: add a CSS editor into the admin GUI&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: add dropdown button actions (example on Create button on project)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: color for start date and owner&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: new tab for reception and shipment&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: better design for the page of discounts of a thirdparty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: GUI: can set background style with MAIN_LOGIN_BACKGROUND_STYLE&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Help: Tooltip to explain how to add a photo on a product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: helper functions for dates + small demo case&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR - Salary: can fill date of salary payment with date of start of salary&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR - Salary: can modify the date of payment of a salary (if not reconciled)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR - Salary: date for salary payment includes the hour/min&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HR - Salary: adding button Send Email on the salary file&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Import: filter on entity in import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Import: map table to element for get entity in import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Installation: Auto activate some modules on install (Export/Import/Wysiwyg editor)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice: show category of operations&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice: add customer code to invoices listing&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Keep a link between user created from recruitment and application&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Mass Actions: Better responsive for mass actions&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: add numbering modules for members&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: add widget box_members_by_tags.php&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: Captcha for public member&amp;#039;s subscription form&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: migration script + delete old table + rename fields and indexes&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MRP MO: Dynamic choice of warehouse and batch in MO production.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Multicurrency REST API to create, update, delete, update rate...&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Multiselect for filter on prospection status&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: [Bulk delete Project tasks]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: No overwrite of optionals during put() contact&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Notifications: add Customer Order delivered (ORDER_NEW) in module Notification&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Notifications: for Sign or Refused Propal from Online Page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Now we can edit amount on VAT and salaries clone action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: only get opened contact from liste_contact function, to not have access to closed contact as mail receiver&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option: MAIN_SECURITY_MAXFILESIZE_DOWNLOADED&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option to manage deposit slips for more payment modes&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option to show column for field and line selection on the left&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Orders: add sub total in order list det&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Orders: list product in orders&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Orders export: allow to export field &amp;#039;shipment method&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: payment default values when supplier order created from reception&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment: manage contracts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment: sepaStripe now creates the payment mode with type pm_ using new API&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment: add partial payment reason &amp;quot;withholding tax&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Payment: Can edit account on miscellaneous payment (if not transferred)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: category of operation for crabe PDF model&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: Name and date to print on PDF Sign&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: Use the more recent PDF templates for documents by default on a fresh install&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: Option PDF_SHOW_PHONE_AFTER_USER_CONTACT to show phone after specific assigned contact on PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Print PDF: Option PDF_SHOW_EMAIL_AFTER_USER_CONTACT to show email after specific assigned contact on PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: product images on popup are cached&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Products: Add origin info when create a product batch when created from a movement stock&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Products: Add statistics by amount on statistics of products.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals: filter for Signed+Billed in proposals&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals: can modify margin rates in offers like VAT rates&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals: option filter for NoSalesRepresentativeAffected in proposals list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals: constant PROPALE_ADDON_NOTE_PUBLIC_DEFAULT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Reception: can receive more than qty ordered on reception&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: referential objects of batch&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: remove keys whose table element is the same as element in map list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: repair script skip views&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: search on time spent duration range&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Security: Save date to invalidate other session into user table&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Security: Invalidate all sessions of a user when password is modified.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Service Contracts: Filter on amount and qty on list of service&amp;#039;s contracts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: set today start time at beginning&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show main currency in company info user tooltip&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show supplier invoice ref of direct debit transfer tab invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Social Networks: expend/collapse list of social networks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stock limit for alert and desired optimal stock by product and warehouse import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stock: Add warehouse create and modify triggers.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product_Module#Adding_a_default_warehouse|NEW: Stock: Can select several warehouses into the view stock at date in past]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stripe: add STRIPE_DEBUG, a way to log Stripe IPN&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Invoices: add ability of ODT support to supplier invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Order:  show supplier name in getNomUrl of supplier order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Order:  set payment default values when supplier order created from reception&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier Price:  Add a status on supplier price ref (WIP to close a supplier ref)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support different bank account for several direct debit payments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support multiselect in the warehouse selection combo box&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Poll,_Survey_or_Vote_Module#Adding_a_comment_to_a_poll|NEW: Survey: Comment on survey is possible only after vote.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: adapt category and product pictures sizes on TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: limit load products in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The batch for remind on due date can be setup for using validation date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The refresh link for IMAP collector is always visible&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tickets_Module#Notification_on_a_ticket_creation|NEW: Tickets: Send a notification email when ticket assigned]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: set ticket status to answered if the client has answered from the public interface&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: added an option to display the progress of tickets on the public interface&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: add link to thirdparty tickets history&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets: notify also the contributor affected to a ticket if a new message public is post (add global TICKET_PUBLIC_NOTIFICATION_NEW_MESSAGE_ALSO_CONTRIBUTOR)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Upgrades: The upgrade process can be done by creating a file upgrade.unlock&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Use a cache file for external RSS in calendar&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Use by default the domain $tactic_main_url_root for SMTP HELO&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User_module#Public_Virtual_Cards|NEW: Users: add a public virtual card page for each user]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: VAT can be modified during add of line&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website Module: Increment website counter on each page access in website module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website Module: Show counter of access of website in website list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Widgets: Show picto into the combobox of widgets&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Widgets: Implement MAIN_ACTIVATE_FILECACHE on birthday widget&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Widgets: Add widget &amp;quot;The next upcoming events&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Widgets: Add widget of open opportunities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= ChangeLog for Tactic version 7.0 compared to 6.0 =&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Global_options|NEW: can move the checkbox column on left (experimental option MAIN_CHECKBOX_LEFT_COLUMN)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added columns &amp;#039;alias_name&amp;#039; on project, supplier invoice, supplier order, supplier proposals and task list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added option for dark theme mode in display - color and theme&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added option to auto define barcode numbers for third-parties in barcode module setup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add bank account number used on invoices for debit&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added notes to productlot module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Bank - Add salaries &amp;amp; vat in the tab of planned entries of a bank account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: member module set up made easier&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: projects and thirdparties can be viewed as conversation (&amp;quot;Message&amp;quot; view), like events/agenda.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can now set user supervisors using mass action in htdocs/user&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can chose if VAT ID is unique or not for third parties&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Partnership_management_Module#Creating_a_new_partnership|NEW: all partnerships displayed on tab partnership of a thirdparty and member]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: massaction for updating product prices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Massaction to assign users on projects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: adding js to hide/show advanced option on the export data page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add a graphic option to enable lettering function - FPC21&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add a way to clean some words when you generate thirdparty accounting account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Added an option during export to export or not the lettering FPC21&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Manage supplier deposit with specific account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Model Digitaria - Add a way to clean some words when you generate thirdparty accounting account FPC22&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a button &amp;quot;Test collect&amp;quot; in email collector&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a constant to disallow modification of the product reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a method doAutoRenewContracts that can be used as a cron task.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add &amp;quot; as enclosure by default for CSV export. Keep removing CR/LF.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add attached file in presend email form of thirdparty card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a way to enter LICENSE file content in property of website&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add badge in admin extrafields setup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add constant PROPAL_BYPASS_VALIDATED_STATUS&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Event_Organization#Add_date_and_location|NEW: Add date event and location on event organization]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User_module#Creation_of_a_new_user|NEW: Add employment anniversary in birthday box]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add extrafield type &amp;quot;IP&amp;quot; to store IP addresses&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add fail2ban rules examples to limit access to /public pages&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add filter &amp;quot;Product subject to lot/Serial&amp;quot; in stock per lot/serial&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add hidden option MAIN_EMAIL_SUPPORT_ACK to restore Email ack checkbox&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add IMAP port setting on email collector module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding JAPAN Chart-of-Account and regions/departments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding NIF verification for Algeria&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add link to create an element from the category page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add margin infos to takepos invoice lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add max size send for &amp;quot;backup and link to mail&amp;quot; option&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add more advices into the Setup security page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add new global variable for keeping the previous signature information on proposal (case of reopening a proposal)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add objectLink on shipment&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option &amp;quot;Show price on the generated documents for receptions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add picto property on sub-module for password generation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add redirect on action confirm addconsumedline and addproduceline&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a new advanced permission &amp;quot;read price&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add substitution key __SENDEREMAIL_SIGNATURE__&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the referrer-policy to &amp;quot;same-origin&amp;quot; by default on all public pages.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the SMTP header References on ticket email created by email&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the thirdparty column to the time list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add trigger to record the event of sending an email from a project&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow download link option in module configuration (propal,invoice,supplier proposal, order)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Bulk action to remove a category in list/search website pages&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can copy/paste images into emails sent.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit label of an emailing even once sent&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit property css, cssview, csslist on extrafields&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can enter the unit price including the vat when adding new product lines on invoices, orders, proposals, ...&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can invoice task time per different services&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can join several files by default on email form&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can send an email on scheduled job error&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set a commercial discount by entering amount including VAT&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Scheduled_jobs_Module#Setting_up_Monthly_Frequency|NEW: Can set a monthly frequency (or multiple) in cron tasks.]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set start and end dates and comment on button &amp;quot;Activate all services&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can sort on preselected best supplier price&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product_Module#Adding_stocks_and_inventory|NEW: Can use products categories to make inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Change filter type on tickets list into a multiselect combo&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: conf TIMESPENT_ALWAYS_UPDATE_THM, when it&amp;#039;s on we always check current thm of user to update it in task time line&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: constant PROPAL_NEW_AS_SIGNED&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show date delivery planned on orders linked to company and product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Default doc template of contracts is not mandatory&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Default values in extrafields are no more limited to 255 char.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Point_Of_Sale#Other_Information|NEW: display currency in takepos menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Intervention_Module#Adding_online_signature|NEW: Enable online signature for interventions]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: extrafield price with currency&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: filter on reception dates (from / to) in cheque payment    card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: default_lang for members&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: Table of membership types&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Members: add free membership amounts at the membership type level&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: Header Scroll in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: add price to product box in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: add setup parameters, can setup terminal name&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: support of Stripe Terminal with TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: Receipt preview in TakePOS setup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS: different product list on smartphone&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: can delete a whole website if disabled&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: can remove a website template&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: can set header &amp;quot;Strict-Transport-Security&amp;quot; in web sites.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: can switch status of website and page from the website toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: Templates of websites are now directories and not zip into core repo&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: add 4 other templates in website module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Website: Add counters for public access of pages on a website&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice - Add french mention on pdf when vat debit option is on&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: invoice export : add accounting affectation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: label on products categories filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The link &amp;quot;add to bookmark&amp;quot; is always on top in the bookmark popup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MAIN_SEARCH_CATEGORY_PRODUCT_ON_LISTS const to show category customer filter&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Make module WebservicesClient deprecated. Use module WebHook instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: manage no email with thirdparties (better for GDPR)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Manage Position (Rank) on Contract Lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Manage VAT on all lines on purchases cycle&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Page to show virtual stock at a future date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: On a bank reconciled line, we can modify the bank receipt&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: On a form to send an email, we show all emails of all contacts of object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option PRODUCTBATCH_SHOW_WAREHOUSE_ON_SHIPMENT showing wh on PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option PRODUIT_DESC_IN_FORM accept (desktop only or +smartphone)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Page for mass stock transfer can be used with no source stock&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: parent company column and filter in invoice and order list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add &amp;quot;Show Sales rep&amp;quot; option for PDF&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Picto for shared link is clickable&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: possibility to select scopes with checkbox for Oauth tokens&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: private and public note on user, thirdparty and contact list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: product categories filter on inventory list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Product supplier price: autofill default supplier VAT&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Project - author field become an available column on lists&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Reception - Add a from/to on search on date field&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Start a simple support of recurrent events on agenda&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Resize parent company column in order list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Save one click to select on delivery ack, on emails.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: scheduled job to send unpaid invoice reminder can now use the cc and bcc from email template&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: set thirdparty type with company modify trigger&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show also scheduled task never finished in scheduled task widget&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show badge with number of extrafields in setup&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show category tree in sellist and chkbxlst for common object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show picto and color into combo for selection of tags&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show product label on inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show sell-by and eat-by dates only if not empty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: show SellBy/EatBy dates for each batch product in shipment card&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Proposals_Module|NEW: Can skip accept/refuse steps for proposals (option PROPAL_SKIP_ACCEPT_REFUSE)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: experimental SMTP using PhpImap allowing OAuth2 authentication (need to add option MAIN_IMAP_USE_PHPIMAP)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can substitute project title in mail template&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier order list - Add column private and public note&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Update ActionComm type_code on email message ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: VAT - Admin - Add information on deadline day for submission of VAT declaration&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expand/collapse permissions on user permission page&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show delivery mode on PDF for proposals&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add the target to select attendees of event for emailings&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set background style with MAIN_LOGIN_BACKGROUND_STYLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= ChangeLog for Tactic version 6.0 compared to 5.0 =&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Support for recurring purchase invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Include German public holidays&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show ZATCA QR-Code on PDFs&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show Swiss QR-Code on PDFs&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: added ExtraFields for Stock Mouvement&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: new massaction to assign a sale representatives on a selection of thirdparties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: edit discount pourcentage for all lines in one shot&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accept &amp;#039;auto&amp;#039; for ref of object on import of purchase order/proposal&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add more filters and info on page to bind accounting accounts&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add subledger account when generate a transaction with a deposit invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add a massaction to preselect an account (customer and supplier list)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add hidden feature for accounting reconciliation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: ACE Editor is restored at same cursor position after a save.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add &amp;quot;addMoreActionsButtons&amp;quot; hook to subscription form&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add an option in GUI to show a Quick add button into top menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a workflow to auto link contract on a ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column date of Signature on proposal list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column template invoice in invoice list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add column &amp;quot;Total HT&amp;quot; to products array on document creation card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add configuration for text color of button action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add entity filter in exports&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Show the event block on recurring invoices&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add firstname, lastname and max number of attendees for module &amp;quot;Event Organization&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add margin info in proposal and order list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add massaction &amp;quot;Edit Extrafield&amp;quot; for Product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add more fields to detect duplicate during import of thirdparties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to foce delivery on email for purchase order receipt to yes&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add possibility to create contract from invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Other_setup#Global_options|NEW: Add possibility with constant MAIN_LOGIN_BADCHARUNAUTHORIZED to define bad character unauthorized into login name]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add private and public notes on tax files.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add substitutions &amp;quot;user numbers&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: allow a ticket to be automatically marked as read when created from backend.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: allow cut&amp;amp;paste as real numeric value to excel&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: A public form to send a message and create a lead is available&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: automatically set totally received status in reception&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Auto set invoice paid when adding credit not and remain to pay is 0&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can enter price with tax for predefined products on purchase objects&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can filter on a thirdparty on product statistics&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can removed doc templates from setup page of thirdparty&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: clean values and amount in FEC import&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: constant MAIL_MASS_ACTION_ADD_LAST_IF_MAIN_DOC_NOT_FOUND for mailing mass action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Contact filter project list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Create contract from invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Default value for MAIN_SECURITY_CSRF_WITH_TOKEN is now 2 &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: deposit payment terms: add field into dictionary admin page to define default percentage of deposit.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Dictionaries - add possibility to manage countries in EEC&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Dictionaries - Availability dictionary has a new column unit and number&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Display errors in a message box after generating documents&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Enhance the import. Can use &amp;#039;auto&amp;#039; for the ref (import of orders)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Events on Proposal to Return to Draft&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Page to list expense report payments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: JS inventory autocalc input&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: language support for more emailing target selectors&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: leave requests: add field into type dictionary to block request if balance is negative&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Mass action &amp;quot;Close shipments&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module BOM - add tabs for nets Bom&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module BOM - add the possibility to add sub-BOMs to BOM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Recruitment - Add a public page with list of all open job positions.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Recruitment - Add a tab with list of application on the jobposition file.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to move checkbox column as first column on Thirdparty list (only few screens)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: payment conditions enabling semi-automatic deposit creation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: possibility to consume multiple batch&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Reverse movement product consumption&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Send email to the supplier order contact&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add permission to report time on timesheet&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Knowledge Management - add status &amp;quot;Obsolete&amp;quot; to KM articles&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MRP - split consumption line on MO&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MRP - display physical and virtual stock of the products when creating OF from a BOM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: MRP - display product ref in &amp;quot;Object link&amp;quot; product tab for BOM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Projects - add filter &amp;quot;opportunity status&amp;quot; on statistics of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Proposals - option update prices on proposal cloning&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: SEPA XML - option to place payment Type Info at Credit transfer Transaction level&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stocks - stock filter in reassort lists&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stocks - stock limit in stock export CSV&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stocks - Inventory - can change value of AWP during the inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier order - Show ref supplier of reception in linked object block&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: support user_modif in order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Surveys - Show number of votes into the label of tab &amp;quot;Results&amp;quot; of a survey&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - barcode rule to insert product in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - pagination on search results&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - show product reference&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add constant to hide categories&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add constant to show category description&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: TakePOS - add constant to show only the products in stock&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Themes - add param color button action&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Themes - Change in theme colors does not need to use the refresh button&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Themes - more mode for THEME_TOPMENU_DISABLE_IMAGE (2, 3, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Themes - MD - add param border table for md theme&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Third-Parties - Add rules &amp;quot;customer accountancy code&amp;quot; is mandatory to validate invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Third-Parties - Can set the parent company during the creation of thirdparty (action=add of societe/card.php)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets - create Third-party with contact if not found on public ticket&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets - option to default check &amp;quot;notify tier at creation&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets - Trigger: allow to automatically send messages on new tickets&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Tickets - optional display warning icons on ticket list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Websites Module - supports now the multicompany module&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Websites Module - on redirect of page in website module, GET parameters are kept.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The backup tools has an &amp;quot;lowmemory&amp;quot; option for mysqldump on large database&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: thumbnail field in product list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: total mark rate in list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: uncheck &amp;quot;send message&amp;quot; by default on a ticket when private messages has been checked&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: VAT Report by month - Show detail by rate and also by code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added MMK currency (Myanmar Kyat)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: On a form to send an email, we show all emails of contacts of object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Partnership Management&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Module Event Organization Management&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= ChangeLog Tactic version 5.0 =&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quotations_module#Online_signature|NEW: Online proposal signature]]&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can define some max limit on expense report (per period, per type or expense, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Provide a special pages for bookmarks and multicompany for a better use of some mobile applications&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow the use of NEWREF to get for example the new reference a draft order will get after validation.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to disable globaly some notifications emails.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add NEWREF subtitute to get new object reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add URL_SHIPMENT substitute to get the URL of a shipment&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: REST API module: add api key generate / modify permission.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Make &amp;quot;L&amp;#039;Annuaire des Entreprises&amp;quot; the default provider for SIREN verification for French thirdparties.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add tags on ticket/categories&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Workflow: Close order on shipment closing.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can enter the buying price (for Weighted Average Price update) on lines during the reception step&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add legal form for Sweden&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Add product account in import/export of thirdparty (level 3)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Accountancy - Format FEC/FEC2 - Add column NumFacture&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add auto creation of agenda event on supplier_order cancellation&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add a PDF document template for Manufacturing Orders&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add budget field into task &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add cancel button to classify reception form on supplier_orders&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added address field into contacts list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added documents page and send mail possibility in payments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add edit option in propal&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Added linked files page and send mail possibility in payments&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add field date from/to in customer and supplier payment list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add filter from date to date into action/evt list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add import / export of MO and BOMLines - Close &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adding accounting export model for iSuite Expert&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add link to an element by ref&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add MRP into Object Linked Box&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add option to hide customer code on PDF documents&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add sale representative in order and invoice list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add a setting to create PDF in PDF/A - 1b format &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add SOCIETE_SHOW_VAT_IN_LIST to display VAT number in combo list of thirdparties&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add sortorder on units list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Adds PDF_HIDE_PRODUCT_LABEL_IN_SUPPLIER_LINES to hide product label in supplier order lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add STOCK_MOVEMENT_LIST_HIDE_UNIT_PRICE to hide unit price on some pages&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: add support for zstd compression&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow drag and drop on kits&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allow exporting supplier order validation date + validation user&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Allows product ref generation after the form is validated with PRODUCT_GENERATE_REF_AFTER_FORM&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: autocomplete account group when editing an account card&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Auto create invoice for payment done on an order with online payment link of order&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit fields of proposal when proposal is not yet signed&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can edit the translation key of an overwrote translation key.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can enable/disable external calendar by default&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can hide sender name on PDF documents&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can select lot from a combo list of existing batch numbers (in MRP consumtion)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set the default BOM on a product&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can set/unset the usual working day of the week (friday, saturday, sunday)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Can show progression of task into combo list of tasks&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: can upload the odt file for the product doc template&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Contract - Add From/to input on search date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Customer Display with TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Split Sale in TakePOS&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Customer invoice template list - Add input date from/to&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: date filter on project list and task list From-&amp;gt;To&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: display shipping method and tracking url on shipment list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: conf to force amounts to be entered only including taxes&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: conf to pre-fill start/end dates with bounds of current month&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: show link to already existing overlapping expense report&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: can make project field mandatory on lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Expose bank account holder, label and number &lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: field and behavior in product object&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: generate intervention from time spent&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: holiday: handle monthly balance updates with cronjob&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HRM integration, source code&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HRM admin - Add tabs&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: HRM - Include more options to manage/custom dashboard&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Increase size of params of actions for emailcollector&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Invoice list - Use complete country select field with EEC or not&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: mass action delete, no more break if at least one object has child&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: mass action paid on customer invoice list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: massaction validate on supplier orders list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Mass action send email to all attendees of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: expense reports: conf to pre-fill start/end dates with bounds of current month&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Option &amp;quot;Add a link on the PDF to make the online payment&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: More options to generate PDF (show Frame option, width of picture option)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Preview of pdf files of expense report lines&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: print without details&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: project time spent: conf to prevent recording time after X months&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: rewrite bind accountancy code finding on customer and sales invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Societe - Add perentity functionality on customer/supplier accountancy auxiliary account&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Survey - Add a clickable link in email send&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Social Contributions - Add from/to filter on list&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Supplier order and proposal - Add From/to input on search date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Task - Add From/to input on search date&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add theme option THEME_ELDY_USEBORDERONTABLE&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The Anti-CSRF protection MAIN_SECURITY_CSRF_WITH_TOKEN is on to value 1 by default&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: when multiple order linked to facture, show list into note.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: when we delete several objects with massaction, if somes object has child we must see which objects are concerned and nevertheless delete objects which can be deleted&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Editing a page in website module keep old page with name .back&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: External backups can be downloaded from the &amp;quot;About info page&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Add massaction to switch status on sale / on purchase of a product.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Stable module Knowledge Management&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Experimental module Event Organization Management&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Experimental module Workstations Management&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: Development of module Partnership Management&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=3619</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Sidebar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=3619"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T10:50:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* navigation&lt;br /&gt;
** mainpage|mainpage-description&lt;br /&gt;
** Features|Tactic Features&lt;br /&gt;
** recentchanges-url|recentchanges&lt;br /&gt;
** randompage-url|randompage&lt;br /&gt;
** User-Documentaion|User Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-modules|Tactic modules&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-report-generation|Report Generation&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-How-To|Tactic How To&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-FAQ|Tactic FAQ&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-Tutorials|Tactic Tutorials&lt;br /&gt;
** Tactic-License|Tactic License&lt;br /&gt;
** ChangeLog|Tactic Change Log &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SEARCH&lt;br /&gt;
* TOOLBOX&lt;br /&gt;
* LANGUAGES&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Product_Module&amp;diff=3618</id>
		<title>Product Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Product_Module&amp;diff=3618"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T07:25:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Updating multiple product prices */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Products are the main feature of a business organisation. Therefore, managing the products effectively is necessary to enhance the performance of an organisation. However, a simple error in product management can cause huge issues within a company. This is why, Tactic ERP &amp;amp; CRM software introduces product module to manage all the products at a single space without having to face much complexity. The users will be able to add product variants as well. This will certain help the users by decreasing their manual effort by a good amount. &amp;#039;&amp;#039; This module of Tactic manages the product catalogue for increasing the positive experience of the users. This module helps in managing all of the important aspects that is needed to enrich the organisational business environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services. &lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= What is a product =&lt;br /&gt;
Product is an object that is sold by an organisation to the customers or it can be sold to the organisations by the vendors as well. The organisation can easily stock products in warehouses (which can be recorded in Tactic Warehouse and Stock module). Hence, an organisation will easily be able to track products within an easy interface through Tactic. Moreover, Tactic will help the users in tracking shipments quite easily as well, as products and shipments go hand in hand. The users will also be able to input the value of products and see them listed in the Tactic ERP &amp;amp; CRM software as well. For more specifications that users will be able to input the weights, sizes and important codes, such as customs code, commodity code and license code. &lt;br /&gt;
== Virtual product ==&lt;br /&gt;
With the emergence of technology, products have changed their attires as well. These days, products do not need to have physical dimensions to be sold. These type of goods or products are called the virtual products or digital goods. These virtual products or digital goods can include non-tangible elements, such as membership services, warranties, subscriptions, ERP &amp;amp; CRM software, videos, music and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Management of sales prices in Tactic =&lt;br /&gt;
There are some methods of managing the sales prices within Tactic ERP &amp;amp; CRM software, these methods are: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Each products having a specific price &lt;br /&gt;
*	Different prices for different customer segments &lt;br /&gt;
*	Different prices for different customers &lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity based prices &lt;br /&gt;
As for the product prices based on the segment of customers, Tactic allows 5 groups of customers or 5 customer segments. However, the customers cannot be added to more than one segment for the same time being. Hence, the users need to keep that under consideration while adding the customers in segments.  The customers will be sold the products according to the prices that is defined in the customer segment.&lt;br /&gt;
== Updating multiple product prices ==&lt;br /&gt;
If your company is increasing product prices and you are worrying over how you need to update every price manually by going from product card to product card, then you don’t need to think too much about it all. You can now update prices of multiple products at once by running a mass-action. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At first, you need to open the product list by going to home -&amp;gt; product -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; check the boxes of preferred products -&amp;gt; now go to the select action box and click on the drop down arrow -&amp;gt; at the end of the drop down list you will find an option called ‘increase/decrease customer price -&amp;gt; choose that and click on confirm. Now another new box will open at the beginning of the page. The first box will ask for rate. You need to choose a negative rate if you want to decrease the price and choose normal rating if the prices are to be increased. Once you are done with choosing the rate click on validate. The selling prices will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-price-update-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-price-update-2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-price-update-3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product-price-update-4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of a new product =&lt;br /&gt;
From the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;product&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Product&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; need to be selected. All the important information about the products need to be incorporated by filling all the criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The products are always sorted by the product reference. The references associated with only numbers get the first reference and then it comes the alphabets. The product variants are included in this list as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The products can be shown according to a sort order on units lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_1.PNG|center|link=]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modification can be done by by clicking the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Categories ==&lt;br /&gt;
With the assistance of Tactic, the users will be able to add the products in one or more categories. However, for categorizing the products the users must create categories beforehand. &lt;br /&gt;
== Product variants ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creation of product variants ===  &lt;br /&gt;
Product variants need to be created by going to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Product&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module in Tactic. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Variant Attribute&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be selected for creating variants for a specific product. All the related fields need to be filled for better users’ experience. However, it is important to add an existing product first to create product variant.The modification of a product label is reflected in all the places that the product is associated with. This includes the child label of product variants as well. If you change a product label, the labels of product variants will change as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic now offers you with the facility of forcing the product references. You can add reference number to your products in the way you like. For accomplishing this, all you need to do is to go to the product card by going through the steps of products &amp;amp; services (from main menu) -&amp;gt; products -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned product -&amp;gt; modify -&amp;gt; the field of product reference will be shown at the beginning of the product card -&amp;gt; modify it as per your liking -&amp;gt; save. The modified product reference will be saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pro_var_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pro_var_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modifying product variants === &lt;br /&gt;
Modification of a product variant need to be performed by going to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option. After modifying the users need to save the new information.     &lt;br /&gt;
=== Deleting product variants ===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be chosen for deleting a product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Modifying a product =&lt;br /&gt;
Product information can be modified by going to the list view of existing products. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option need to be selected in order to modify the information.&lt;br /&gt;
= Cloning products =&lt;br /&gt;
Cloning products is a subject to require confirmation. While you are cloning a product, you need to visit the product card and click the “clone” option to make it work. when you click on the cloning option, a confirmation box will open. There will be a filed suggesting the name of the copied product, which can be changed as per the user preference. Then you need to click on “yes” if you want to continue cloning the product. Once you are done cloning, the product will be created the draft status, which you can validate later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cloning_products_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cloning_products_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cloning_products_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are cloning a product, you can define its product reference in the confirmation box. The product reference will show-up as “copy-xxx”, which you can change easily by typing the new reference in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While a product is cloned, the categories that the linked with the said product will be cloned alongside as well. The categories can be changed later on, while the cloned product is still in the draft status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Adding stocks and inventory =&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic offers a separate stock module for helping the companies out with product stock. This stock module allows the users to add product stock to manage the products in a better manner. Warehouses can be added as well. The users can define stocks based on the warehouses, stock limits and many other features to make product management more convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating inventories are now even easier. You can, now, create inventory only with the product category. All you need to do is to access the inventory menu by going to home -&amp;gt; products and services main menu -&amp;gt; inventory -&amp;gt; new. Once the inventory form opens you will see the last criterion, where you can add the product category to create the inventory, choose the preferred category there and hit create.  &lt;br /&gt;
That’s it. You have now successfully created an inventory out of product category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Adding a default warehouse =&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a default warehouse to the products is easy with the help of Tactic. The steps that you need to follow for accomplishing so are provided below, products &amp;amp; services (from main menu) -&amp;gt; products -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned product -&amp;gt; modify -&amp;gt; the field of default warehouse will be shown in the middle of the page, you need to choose the default warehouse by clicking on the drop-down menu and choosing the preferred warehouses -&amp;gt; save. After saving the default warehouse will be determined by Tactic and every stock dispatch of that specific product will take place only through the determined warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are in need of monitoring stocks but are short in time to check each warehouse individually then you can use Tactic’s new feature where you can select multiple warehouses to view a stock of a date of past. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For achieving the same you need to first go to the warehouse module by going to home -&amp;gt; products and services main menu -&amp;gt; warehouses submenu -&amp;gt; stock at date. Once the stock at date page opens, go to the box designated for warehouses and click on the blank space to open the drop-down menu. Now choose the warehouses you need to work with and click on refresh. Don’t forget to add the date before clicking on the refresh button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, you will see all the stock details at the page. Now you can monitor it all without any issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Adding default BOM =&lt;br /&gt;
Just as default warehouse, default BOM can be added to the products, that too very easily. The mentioned steps need to be followed for achieving the same, &lt;br /&gt;
products &amp;amp; services (from main menu) -&amp;gt; products -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the concerned product -&amp;gt; modify -&amp;gt; the field of default BOM will be shown in the middle of the page, you need to choose the default BOM by clicking on the drop-down menu and choosing the preferred warehouses -&amp;gt; save. The default BOM for that particular product will be determined by Tactic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Using personalized fields =&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a field that requires to be associated with your company’s products and services; however, if Tactic does not offer that field by default, then you can add your personalized field to that products and services by yourself. These personalized fields are also gone by the name of extra-fields. For adding the personalized fields or the extra-fields the users need to follow a few steps, which are, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Home -&amp;gt; setup -&amp;gt; product management -&amp;gt; products/services -&amp;gt; click on the cog sign -&amp;gt; complementary attribute -&amp;gt; new attribute -&amp;gt; fill all the important criteria -&amp;gt; save. The new field will be created in Tactic’s products/service module easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_extrafield_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_extrafield_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_extrafield_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Product_extrafield_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting a product =&lt;br /&gt;
As long as a product is engaged with different invoices, warehouses and more a product cannot be deleted.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-price-update-4.PNG&amp;diff=3617</id>
		<title>File:Product-price-update-4.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-price-update-4.PNG&amp;diff=3617"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T07:20:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-price-update-3.PNG&amp;diff=3616</id>
		<title>File:Product-price-update-3.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-price-update-3.PNG&amp;diff=3616"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T07:19:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-price-update-2.PNG&amp;diff=3615</id>
		<title>File:Product-price-update-2.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-price-update-2.PNG&amp;diff=3615"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T07:19:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-price-update-1.PNG&amp;diff=3614</id>
		<title>File:Product-price-update-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Product-price-update-1.PNG&amp;diff=3614"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T07:19:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Product_Lots_Module&amp;diff=3613</id>
		<title>Product Lots Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Product_Lots_Module&amp;diff=3613"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T06:58:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Adding notes to Product lots */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;An organisation can have a number of products, which requires to be stocked based on their lot and serial number. The primary objective of using lot and serial number is to manage stocks of a product before their expiry dates. Managing warehouses comes hand in hand with managing lots and serials. Tactic helps in managing the lots and serials effectively.&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This module helps the users in managing the ProductBatch in a better and more organised manner. The users can manage their products with the help of the following criteria: &lt;br /&gt;
*	Serial numbers &lt;br /&gt;
*	Eat by date, best before date, best by&lt;br /&gt;
*	Sell by date, shelf life expiration date, use by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services. &lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
= Adding notes to Product lots =&lt;br /&gt;
The users can now add notes to product lots as well. For achieving the same you need to access the product lot card first y going to home -&amp;gt; products and services main menu -&amp;gt; lot/serial under products submenu -&amp;gt; choose the preferred lot from the list -&amp;gt; go to the notes tab from the product lot card. Now, once you are at the notes tab, you will see two criteria, public note and private note, click on the pen icon to add your preferred note. Hit modify once you are done adding your note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notes-in-lots.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Notes-in-lots.PNG&amp;diff=3612</id>
		<title>File:Notes-in-lots.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Notes-in-lots.PNG&amp;diff=3612"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T06:58:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Salaries_Module&amp;diff=3611</id>
		<title>Salaries Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Salaries_Module&amp;diff=3611"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T06:51:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Sending salary-related updates via email */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
Salary module have been constructed for allowing the users to manage their employee salaries digitally. This module helps the users in keeping the record of the salary while updating the status. The users can signify if the salary has been paid or not. &lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services.&lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of salary =&lt;br /&gt;
The creation of salary can be completed from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module. The users need to choose &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option from the main menu bar and then choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;salaries&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; should be clicked for proceeding with the task of creating new salary. All the important details need to be incorporated before saving the salary card. The salary card can be saved by clicking on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sal_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sal_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sal_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sending salary-related updates via email ==&lt;br /&gt;
For sending an email directly from the salary card, you need to open the salary card first. The steps of the same are home -&amp;gt; bills and payment -&amp;gt; salary -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the determined salary. When the salary card opens you will find the “Send email” button on the right side of the page, click on that button. Now you need to compose your mail and click on “send email” button once you are done. The mail will be sent in no time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Salary-mail.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modifying dates ==&lt;br /&gt;
For modifying the date of a salary (if not reconciled), you need to access the list of the salary but going to home -&amp;gt; bills and payment -&amp;gt; salary -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the determined salary. Click on the modify button once the salary card opens. There you will see a little edit icon beside the payment date, click on it and put down the preferred date. Click on save when done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a document ==&lt;br /&gt;
For adding a document to the payment, all you need to do is to open the payment by going to home -&amp;gt; Billing and payment main menu -&amp;gt; choose the payment from any preferred submenu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now when the payment card opens, you will find a Linked files tab at the top. You need to go to that tab and click on ‘browse’ to choose the local files from your system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Documents-in-payment.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done choosing the files, click on upload and your file will be uploaded and attached to the payment easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Life cycle of salary = &lt;br /&gt;
The creation of a commercial salary is done with the status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Draft&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The status of salary will be changed to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Validated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; after being validated by an admin or another user. After paying the salary, the status of the salary can be changed to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the salary is unsuccessful to be paid, the status can be change to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unpaid&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Salary-mail.PNG&amp;diff=3610</id>
		<title>File:Salary-mail.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Salary-mail.PNG&amp;diff=3610"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T06:50:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Salaries_Module&amp;diff=3609</id>
		<title>Salaries Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Salaries_Module&amp;diff=3609"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T06:33:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Adding a document */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
Salary module have been constructed for allowing the users to manage their employee salaries digitally. This module helps the users in keeping the record of the salary while updating the status. The users can signify if the salary has been paid or not. &lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services.&lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of salary =&lt;br /&gt;
The creation of salary can be completed from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module. The users need to choose &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option from the main menu bar and then choose the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;salaries&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; should be clicked for proceeding with the task of creating new salary. All the important details need to be incorporated before saving the salary card. The salary card can be saved by clicking on the option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sal_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sal_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sal_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sending salary-related updates via email ==&lt;br /&gt;
For sending an email directly from the salary card, you need to open the salary card first. The steps of the same are home -&amp;gt; bills and payment -&amp;gt; salary -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the determined salary. When the salary card opens you will find the “Send email” button on the right side of the page, click on that button. Now you need to compose your mail and click on “send email” button once you are done. The mail will be sent in no time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modifying dates ==&lt;br /&gt;
For modifying the date of a salary (if not reconciled), you need to access the list of the salary but going to home -&amp;gt; bills and payment -&amp;gt; salary -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the determined salary. Click on the modify button once the salary card opens. There you will see a little edit icon beside the payment date, click on it and put down the preferred date. Click on save when done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a document ==&lt;br /&gt;
For adding a document to the payment, all you need to do is to open the payment by going to home -&amp;gt; Billing and payment main menu -&amp;gt; choose the payment from any preferred submenu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now when the payment card opens, you will find a Linked files tab at the top. You need to go to that tab and click on ‘browse’ to choose the local files from your system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Documents-in-payment.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done choosing the files, click on upload and your file will be uploaded and attached to the payment easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Life cycle of salary = &lt;br /&gt;
The creation of a commercial salary is done with the status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Draft&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The status of salary will be changed to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Validated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; after being validated by an admin or another user. After paying the salary, the status of the salary can be changed to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the salary is unsuccessful to be paid, the status can be change to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unpaid&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Documents-in-payment.PNG&amp;diff=3608</id>
		<title>File:Documents-in-payment.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Documents-in-payment.PNG&amp;diff=3608"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T06:23:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Vendor_Commercial_Proposal_Module&amp;diff=3607</id>
		<title>Vendor Commercial Proposal Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Vendor_Commercial_Proposal_Module&amp;diff=3607"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T05:56:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Proposal template */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial proposals are defined as one of the most important aspects of business. Vendor commercial proposals are the documentation of the business relationship that take place between a company and their vendors. Tactic’s vendor commercial proposal takes care of the all vendor proposals effectively while updating the progress of the proposals. The users can easily track the progress of the proposals with the help of Tactic’s analytical interface. &lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services.&lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Life cycle of commercial proposals =&lt;br /&gt;
The creation of a commercial proposal is done with the status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Draft&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The status of proposal will be changed to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Validated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; after being validated by an admin or another user. Upon the acceptance of the customer, the status of the proposal can be changed to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Signed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the customer refuses the proposal, the status can be change to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Refused&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
= Creation of a proposal =&lt;br /&gt;
Creation of a commercial proposal is performed with the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Commercial Proposal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu. The option of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Proposal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; needs to be chosen for proceeding with the creation of a new proposal.  The proposals can be modified based on the upgradation of important information. For modifying the proposals the users need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ven_pro_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Closure of proposal =&lt;br /&gt;
A commercial proposal can be closed automatically when its status is set as &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;signed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;refused&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the proposal is singed the workflow link will automatically direct it towards billing, which will be considered as a proposal closure. If a proposal is refused, it will be closed automatically as well. However, the users of Tactic need to set-up automatic closure to enable this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ven_pro_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Proposal template =&lt;br /&gt;
A proposal can be designed in different forms as per the organisational needs. The users can use their preferred document template through Tactic for enhancing user experience. The users can also create their own templates if they are comfortable with language php.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want one PDF containing all the vendor proposals, then you can now merge all the PDFs into one and use that for your own convenience. For generating one merged PDF for all your vendor proposals, all you need to do is to open the vendor proposal list from home -&amp;gt; Commerce main menu -&amp;gt; vendor proposals -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; select the proposals you want to merge -&amp;gt; go to the ‘select action’ box -&amp;gt; choose the option of ‘PDF merge’ -&amp;gt; click on ‘confirm’ -&amp;gt; the PDF will be generated and shown at the end of the page -&amp;gt; click on the PDF name to download the same. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:V-prop-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:V-prop-2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:V-prop-3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:V-prop-4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:V-prop-5.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And just like that you will have a merged PDF all for your use.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-5.PNG&amp;diff=3606</id>
		<title>File:V-prop-5.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-5.PNG&amp;diff=3606"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T05:50:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-4.PNG&amp;diff=3605</id>
		<title>File:V-prop-4.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-4.PNG&amp;diff=3605"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T05:49:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-3.PNG&amp;diff=3604</id>
		<title>File:V-prop-3.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-3.PNG&amp;diff=3604"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T05:49:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-2.PNG&amp;diff=3603</id>
		<title>File:V-prop-2.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-2.PNG&amp;diff=3603"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T05:48:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-1.PNG&amp;diff=3602</id>
		<title>File:V-prop-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:V-prop-1.PNG&amp;diff=3602"/>
		<updated>2024-10-29T05:48:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Intervention-os-4.PNG&amp;diff=3601</id>
		<title>File:Intervention-os-4.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Intervention-os-4.PNG&amp;diff=3601"/>
		<updated>2024-10-28T09:05:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Intervention-os-3.PNG&amp;diff=3600</id>
		<title>File:Intervention-os-3.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Intervention-os-3.PNG&amp;diff=3600"/>
		<updated>2024-10-28T09:05:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Intervention-os-2.PNG&amp;diff=3599</id>
		<title>File:Intervention-os-2.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Intervention-os-2.PNG&amp;diff=3599"/>
		<updated>2024-10-28T09:05:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Intervention-os-1.PNG&amp;diff=3598</id>
		<title>File:Intervention-os-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Intervention-os-1.PNG&amp;diff=3598"/>
		<updated>2024-10-28T09:04:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Partnership_management_Module&amp;diff=3597</id>
		<title>Partnership management Module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=Partnership_management_Module&amp;diff=3597"/>
		<updated>2024-10-28T08:07:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: /* Creating a new partnership */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
A company can have several partnerships, with its customers, vendors, prospects and many more. Managing these partnerships are now easy with the help of Tactic’s partnership management module. You can easily create and manage several partnership within the same interface without having to put much of your manual effort. &lt;br /&gt;
= Installation =&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need of installing this module, as it is already included within Tactic services.&lt;br /&gt;
= Setup =&lt;br /&gt;
For using this module the users need to enable it by using an administrator account. The menu options for activating this module are: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home –&amp;gt; Setup – &amp;gt; Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The users then need to click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The modules will be activated after completing this step. The settings icon {{#fas:cog}} will be visible at the end of the module box, the users can click in that to access further setup for this module to access the functionalities in a better way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Creating a new partnership =&lt;br /&gt;
For creating a new partnership, the users need to follow the following steps. &lt;br /&gt;
* At first, you need to go to the third-party module by choosing the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“third-party”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; menu from the main menu bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The partnership sub menu should be visible in the sub menu bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“new partnership”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option. &lt;br /&gt;
* Fill all the important criteria&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;create&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Partnership_management_1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you click on create, the new partnership will be created. By the default rule, the partnership will be created in draft status. At first, you need to validate it by clicking on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;quot;validate&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and then You can approve it by clicking on the option, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“approve”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and terminate it by clicking on the option &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“terminate”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Partnership_management_2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Partnership_management_3.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Partnership_management_4.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add objects to the partnerships and link events to make it easier to find any important occurrence related to the event. There are options for linking files and adding notes to the partnerships as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to carry on a partnership with the public for your company’s interest, then you can achieve that by creating a public self-registration form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tactic now offers and easier way of keeping a track of your third-party partnerships. You can see all the available partnerships under your third-party card very easily. All you need to do is to open your third-party by going to home -&amp;gt; third-party -&amp;gt; list -&amp;gt; choose the third-party -&amp;gt; click on the partnership tab. You can see all the partnerships associated with that particular third-party under this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Partnership-tab-1.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Partnership-tab-2.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Deleting a partnership =&lt;br /&gt;
For deleting a partnership, you need to open the partnership card from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“list”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option and then click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;“delete”&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; option. Any record of the partnership will be deleted with this action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Partnership_management_5.PNG|center|link=]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Partnership-tab-2.PNG&amp;diff=3596</id>
		<title>File:Partnership-tab-2.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Partnership-tab-2.PNG&amp;diff=3596"/>
		<updated>2024-10-28T08:06:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Partnership-tab-1.PNG&amp;diff=3595</id>
		<title>File:Partnership-tab-1.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Partnership-tab-1.PNG&amp;diff=3595"/>
		<updated>2024-10-28T08:05:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Vat-id-for-third-party-3.PNG&amp;diff=3594</id>
		<title>File:Vat-id-for-third-party-3.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tactic-wiki.alsoft.org/index.php?title=File:Vat-id-for-third-party-3.PNG&amp;diff=3594"/>
		<updated>2024-10-28T07:57:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;N.paul: N.paul uploaded a new version of File:Vat-id-for-third-party-3.PNG&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>N.paul</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>